1. society
2. work
3. contracts

City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall
Renovation Project
2232 East Main Street
Bexley, Ohio 43209
PROJECT
MANUAL
June 24, 2014
City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Sealed bids will be received by The City of Bexley at 2242 East Main Street, Bexley,
Ohio 43209 for the following Project:
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
2232 East Main Street
Bexley, Ohio 43209
in accordance with the Contract Documents prepared by:
GRA+D Architects
330 West Spring Street, Suite #355
Columbus, Ohio 43215
614-228-2122
614-228-5122 (fax)
Requests for consideration of any Proposed Equal for a specified product, equipment or
service shall be submitted to the Architect consistent with the requirements defined in the
Instructions To Bidders. Additional products, equipment and services shall be confirmed
as Approved Equal only by Addendum.
Bidders shall submit bids that are in compliance with the Standard Conditions of
Contract for Construction and Special Conditions, if any, included in the Contract
Documents. Prevailing Wage rates and Equal Employment Opportunity requirements are
applicable to this project.
DOMESTIC STEEL USE REQUIREMENTS AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 153.011,
OHIO REVISED CODE APPLY TO THIS PROJECT.
Bidders are required to be enrolled in and to be in good standing in a Drug-Free
Workplace Program (DFWP) approved by the Ohio Bureau of Workers' Compensation
(OBWC) prior to submitting a Bid and are required to provide, on the Bid Form with its
Bid, certain information relative to their enrollment in such a program; and, if awarded a
Contract, shall comply with other DFWP criteria described in the General Conditions –
Drug Free Workplace Program Participation.
Lump Sum General Contractor only bids will be received for this Project. This Project
will not accept separate prime bids from other trades. Bids are due no later than July
11, 2014 at 10:00 a.m. Bids will be opened and read publicly. All bidders will be
Contractor
June 24, 2014
NB - 1
4646257v1
notified after the bid opening of the results of the bid process. The estimated construction
cost value of this Project is between $750,000.00 and $800,000.00.
Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting: All prospective bidders must attend the Pre-Bid Meeting
on July 3, 2014 at 10:00 a.m., at the City of Bexley Offices noted above.
Contract Documents are available from Key Blue Prints, Inc. (North Office), 6180
Cleveland Avenue, Columbus, Ohio 43231; phone: (614) 899-6180, fax: (614) 899-6786,
Web Site: www.keycompanies.com by paying to Key Blue Print, Inc. the actual cost of
printing and shipping of the Contract Documents. All Contractors, Subcontractors and
Suppliers are required to pay the cost of printing and shipping of the Contract
Documents. Contract Documents are not available on a deposit/refund basis.
The Contract Documents may be reviewed for bidding purposes without charge during
business hours at the following locations:
City of Bexley Offices, Dodge Scan (F.W. Dodge), Builder's Exchange, and The
Association of Minority Contractors, 1000 East Main Street, Columbus, Ohio.
Each Bid must be accompanied by a certified check in the sum of 10% of the Bid on
solvent bank, or a Bid Bond in the full amount of the Bid, acceptable to the City of
Bexley, as a guarantee that if the Bid is accepted, a contract will be entered into.
The prevailing wage laws and regulations of the State of Ohio are applicable to this
Project. Contractors must ensure that employees and applicants for employment are not
discriminated against because of their race, creed, color, sex or national origin.
The City of Bexley reserves the right to waive any informalities or to reject any or all
bids.
Contractor
June 24, 2014
NB - 2
4646257v1
City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
STANARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table Of Contents................................................................................................................. (TC)
Definitions............................................................................................................................ (D)
Instructions To Bidders......................................................................................................... (IB)
Bid Form............................................................................................................................... (BF)
Summary of Work………………………………………………………………………… (SOW)
Qualified Bidder Information Form (Submit prior to or with Bid Form)......……..……… (QBI)
Form Of Contract.................................................................................................................. (K)
Contract Bond....................................................................................................................... (CB)
General Conditions............................................................................................................... (GC)
Change Order Procedure And Pricing Guidelines.............................................................. (CO)
PART II
Drawings/Specifications
Existing Exterior Condition Photos
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
TC - 1
City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
STANDARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
DEFINITIONS
1.
Addenda or Addendum - A written or graphic instruction issued prior to the
opening of bids which clarifies, amends or interprets the Contract Documents.
2.
Alternate - A proposed change in the Work described in the Contract Documents
providing the Owner with an option to select between alternative materials,
products or systems, or to add or delete portions of the Work.
3.
Application for Payment - The form furnished by the Owner that is to be used by
the Contractor in requesting progress payments and which when signed by the
Contractor shall serve as an affidavit that payments previously paid by the Owner
have been applied by the Contractor to discharge in full all of Contractor's
obligations incurred in connection with the Work covered by all prior
Applications for Payment.
4.
Approved Equal - Material, equipment or method proposed by the Contractor and
approved by the Architect for incorporation in or use in the Work as being
equivalent to essential attributes of the material, equipment or method specified in
the Contract Documents.
5.
As-Built Drawings - Drawings or computer files revised by the Contractor to
show changes made during the construction process.
6.
Architect - The individual or firm, along with his consultants, responsible for
providing professional design services and contract administration for the Project.
7.
Base Bid - The amount of money stated in a bid as the sum for which the Bidder
offers to perform the Work described in the Contract Documents, exclusive of
adjustments for Alternate bids.
8.
Bid Form - The form furnished by the Owner that is to be completed, signed and
submitted as the Bidder's bid.
9.
Bidder - A person or entity who submits a bid for a contract with the Owner.
10.
Bid Guaranty – The Bond or other instrument of security furnished by the Bidder
to provide assurance that the Bidder will execute the Contract.
11.
Bond – Bid, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security,
furnished by the Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety.
June 24, 2014
General Contractor
D-1
12.
Bulletin - A document issued by the Architect after the execution of the Contract
requesting a Proposal from the Contractor which, if approved as provided in the
Contract Documents, will cause the execution of a Change Order to modify,
amend or alter the Contract Documents.
13.
Change Order - A document recommended by the Architect and Construction
Manager, authorized by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, which
authorizes a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract price or
Contract time.
14.
Claim Affidavit - A claim on the funds that are due to a Contractor, created by
statute in favor of a person supplying labor, materials or services for the value of
labor, materials or services supplied by the claimant.
15.
Construction Budget - The total amount budgeted by the Owner for the
construction Contracts required for the Project.
16.
Construction Schedule - The schedule for the construction of the Project showing
the time for completing the Work, the planned sequence for performing the Work,
and the interrelationship between the activities of the Contractors and the Owner.
17.
Contract – The Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor as set forth in
the Contract Documents.
18.
Contract Completion - The date upon which all deficiencies noted in the Punch
List have been corrected, the Contractor's Work is 100 percent complete, and the
Contractor has complied with all conditions precedent to final payment and
release of retainage.
19.
Contract Cost Breakdown - A statement furnished by the Contractor to the Owner
reflecting the portions of the Contract price allocated to the various portions of
the Work and used as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for
Payment.
20.
Contract Documents - Collectively, the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda,
Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Definitions, Bid Form, Contract and
Attachments, Bond, Bulletins, Shop Drawings, Change Orders, Change Order
Procedure and Pricing Guidelines and Standard Conditions of the Contract
(General and Special).
21.
Contractor - A successful Bidder with whom the Owner has entered into a
Contract for the performance of Work on the Project in cooperation with other
Contractors and persons and in accordance with the Contract Documents.
22.
Day - Calendar day, unless otherwise expressly specified to mean a working day.
23.
Defective - When modifying the word Work, refers to Work that does not
conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any
applicable statute, rule or regulation, inspection, reference standard, test or
June 24, 2014
General Contractor
D-2
approval, or has been damaged prior to the Architect's recommendation of final
payment, unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been expressly
assumed by the Owner.
24.
Drawings - The graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents,
showing the design, type of construction, location, dimension and character of the
Work to be provided by the Contractor, generally including plans, elevations,
sections, details, schedules, diagrams, notes and portions of Specification.
25.
Field Work Order - A written order issued by the Architect, through the
Construction Manager or by the Construction Manager directly, that clarifies or
interprets the Contract Documents or orders a change to the Work.
26.
Final Acceptance - The Owner’s acceptance of the Project from the Contractor
upon certification by the Architect of Contract Completion.
27.
Final Inspection - Final review of the Work of the Contractor by the Architect to
determine whether issuance of the certificate of Contract Completion is
appropriate.
28.
Guarantee - Legally enforceable assurance, for a period of one year unless
otherwise specifically identified in the Contract Documents from Contract
Completion, of quality or performance of the Contractor’s workmanship.
29.
Lead Contractor (if applicable) – The Contractor identified by the Owner’s
Representative in the Notice to Bidders as responsible for scheduling the Project,
coordinating the Contractors (including all submittals and on-site activities) and
providing other services identified in the Contract Documents.
30.
Liquidated Damages - The sum established in the Contract Documents as the
predetermined measure of damages to be paid to the Owner due to the
Contractor's failure to complete the Work, or portions thereof, within a stipulated
time.
31.
Material Supplier - A person or entity who furnishes materials or supplies for
Work on a Project.
32.
Notice of Intent to Award - The notice provided to the apparently successful
Bidder stating that upon satisfactory compliance with all conditions precedent for
Contract execution, within the time specified, the Owner intends to execute a
Contract with the Bidder.
33.
Notice of Commencement - The notice prepared by the Owner identifying the
Project, the Contractors, the Surety for each Contractor and the name of the
Owner’s representative upon whom a Claim Affidavit may be served.
34.
Notice to Proceed - A notice provided by the Owner to the Contractor authorizing
the Contractor to proceed with the Work and establishing the date for
commencement of the Work.
June 24, 2014
General Contractor
D-3
35.
Or Equal - See Approved Equal.
36.
Owner – City of Bexley, 2242 East Main Street, Bexley, Ohio 43209.
37.
Partial Occupancy - The stage in the progress of the Work when the Project, or a
designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete in accordance with the
Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Project, or designated
portion thereof, for its intended use.
38.
Person – An individual, corporation, business trust, estate, partnership,
association or other entity, public or private.
39.
Plans – See Drawings.
40.
Project - The improvement to be constructed of which the Work performed under
the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part.
41.
Proposal - The offer of a Contractor to complete the Work set forth in a Bulletin
or scope of work description.
42.
Punch List - A list of items of Work to be completed or corrected by the
Contractor as a condition precedent to Contract Completion.
43.
Record Drawings - Drawings or computer files revised by the Architect to show
the changes made during the construction process, based on the As-Built
Drawings furnished by the Contractor to the Architect.
44.
Request for Information – Written request from the Contractor to the Architect
seeking an interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.
45.
Samples - Physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials,
equipment or workmanship and establish Standards by which the Work will be
judged.
46.
Schedule of Values - See Contract Cost Breakdown.
47.
Shop Drawings - Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance
charts, brochures, catalog data and other data specially prepared or provided by
the Contractor, a Subcontractor or Material Supplier to illustrate some portion of
the Work.
48.
Specifications - Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of the
written requirements and standards for materials, equipment, construction systems
and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details
applicable thereto.
49.
Standard - The items named in the Specifications or Addendum to denote kind,
quality or performance requirement for each significant portion of the Work. All
June 24, 2014
General Contractor
D-4
bids or Proposals shall be based on the trade names, catalog numbers,
manufacturers, materials or equipment named in the Specifications or Addendum.
50.
Standard Conditions - The standard terms and conditions of the Contract for
construction, as in effect from time to time.
51.
Subcontractor - A person or entity who undertakes to construct, alter, erect,
improve, repair, demolish, remove, dig or drill any part of the Project under a
contract with any Contractor.
52.
Substitution - A proposed Equal to a Standard which must be submitted to the
Architect and which, if approved, will be listed in an Addendum and distributed
to all Bidders.
53.
Surety - A person or entity providing a Bid Guaranty or a Bond to a Bidder or a
Contractor to indemnify the Owner against all direct and consequential damages
suffered by failure of the Bidder to enter into the Contract or of the Contractor to
perform the Contract and to pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors, Material
Suppliers and laborers, as applicable.
54.
Unit Price - The amount stated in the bid as the price per unit of measurement for
materials or services described in the Contract Documents, which cost shall
include overhead, profit and any other expense for the Work.
55.
Warranty - Legally enforceable assurance, for the specified duration from
acceptance by the Owner, of quality or performance of materials and equipment.
56.
Work - The construction services required by the Contract Documents, to include
all labor, materials, equipment and services performed or provided by the
Contractor for the Project.
June 24, 2014
General Contractor
D-5
City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Article 1
Article 2
Article 3
Article 4
Article 5
Article 6
General Information
Bidding Procedures
Bid Opening and Consideration of Bids
Withdrawal of Bid
Bid Guaranty and Contract Bond
Contract Award and Execution
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1
1.2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1.1
All Bidders are advised that all of this Project’s documents, including
the Standard Conditions of Contract for Construction have been
prepared specifically for the City of Bexley – City Hall Renovation
Project. Accordingly, Bidders should thoroughly familiarize themselves
with all of the bid and Contract Documents, and should not presume that
they are the same as documents prepared/issued for other projects with
which the Bidder may be familiar.
1.1.2
All Bidders are advised that this Project is a “Signature Project” and
should incorporate into their bid any and all amounts necessary to
prosecute the Work accordingly.
PROJECT SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION
1.2.1
The time for completion of the Project indicated on the Bid Form shall
be the Contract Completion time applicable to the Bidders. The
Contractor shall include a Project Construction Schedule with its bid
that defines the major components of the Work and defines critical
activities such as shop drawing submittals, approvals, etc.
1.2.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the Project,
coordinating the work activities of Subcontractors, and providing other
services identified in the Contract Documents.
1.2.3
There will only be a single General Contractor award for this Project.
There will not be multiple prime contracts for this Project.
1.2.4
The Bidder agrees that the bid amount shall cover all expenses which
may become due from the Owner resulting from interference, disruption,
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 1
4646862v1
hindrance or delay caused by the Contractor or its agents and
employees.
1.2.5
1.3
1.4
The Bidder agrees that the Bidder will make no claim against the Owner
for additional compensation or mitigation of Liquidated Damages for
any interference, disruption, hindrance or delay caused by the
Contractor.
GIVING NOTICE
1.3.1
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving
of notice, such notice shall be deemed to have been validly given if
delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the company or
organization for whom the notice is intended, or if delivered at or sent
by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business
address of such individual or company known to the giver of the notice.
1.3.2
When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by
days, it shall be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of
such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday,
Sunday or a legal holiday, such day will be omitted from the
computation and such period shall be deemed to end on the next
succeeding day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or legal holiday.
USE OF FACSIMILE TRANSMISSION
1.4.1
Any notice required to be given shall be effective if provided by
facsimile transmission or e-mail, but such notice shall not be considered
official until the original signed document is delivered pursuant to
paragraph IB 1.3.
1.4.2
Withdrawal of a bid by facsimile transmission will be ineffective unless
an original signed document is received by the Owner within two (2)
days of receipt of the facsimile transmission.
ARTICLE 2 - BIDDING PROCEDURES
2.1
EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND PROJECT SITE
2.1.1
The Bidder shall examine all Contract Documents, including without
limitation the Drawings and Specifications for all divisions of Work
listed in the associated Bid Documents, noting particularly all
requirements which will affect the Bidder's Work in any way.
2.1.2
Failure of a Bidder to be acquainted with the amount and nature of Work
required to complete any applicable division of the Work, in conformity
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 2
4646862v1
with all requirements of the Project as a whole, will not be considered as
a basis for additional compensation.
2.1.3
2.2
2.3
The Bidder shall evaluate the Project site and related Project conditions
where the Work will be performed, including without limitation the
following:
2.1.3.1
The condition, layout and nature of the Project site and
surrounding area;
2.1.3.2
The availability and cost of labor;
2.1.3.3
The availability and cost of materials, supplies and equipment;
2.1.3.4
The cost of temporary utilities required in the bid;
2.1.3.5
The cost of any permit or license required by a local or
regional authority having jurisdiction over the Project;
2.1.3.6
The generally prevailing climatic conditions;
2.1.3.7
Conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and
storage of materials.
PRE-BID MEETING
2.2.1
The Bidder is required to attend the pre-bid meeting, where the
Architect, the Owner’s Representative and the Owner will answer
questions regarding the Contract Documents.
2.2.2
The Architect, in conjunction with the Owner’s Representative, shall
prepare minutes of the pre-bid meeting, which will be provided to a
Bidder.
2.2.3
Failure of the Bidder to attend the pre-bid meeting may result in the
rejection of the Bidder’s bid.
2.2.4
Site visits may be scheduled by contacting the Architect and Owner’s
Representative.
INTERPRETATION
2.3.1
If the Bidder finds any perceived conflict, error, omission or discrepancy
on or between any of the Contract Documents, including without
limitation the Drawings and Specifications, or between any of the
Contract Documents and any applicable provision of law, including
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 3
4646862v1
without limitation the Ohio Building Code, the Bidder shall submit a
written request to the Architect for an interpretation or clarification.
2.3.2
2.3.1.1
The Bidder shall be responsible for prompt delivery of such
request.
2.3.1.2
In order to prevent an extension of the bid opening, the Bidder
submit all requests for interpretation a minimum of seven (7)
days before the bid opening.
The Architect in conjunction with the Owner’s Representative shall
issue an Addendum, to the extent deemed appropriate, to requests for
interpretation of the Contract Documents and provide a copy to each
person of record holding Drawings and Specifications.
2.3.2.1
2.4
2.5
The Addenda shall be deemed to have been validly given if the
Addenda is issued and mailed or otherwise made available to
each person of record holding Drawings and Specifications.
2.3.3
Any interpretation of the Contract Documents made by any person other
than the Architect, or in any manner other than the written minutes of
the pre-bid meeting or a written Addendum, shall not be binding and the
Bidder shall not rely upon any such interpretation.
2.3.4
The Bidder shall not, at any time after the execution of the Contract, be
compensated for a claim alleging insufficient data, incomplete Contract
Documents, or incorrectly assumed conditions regarding the nature or
character of the Work, if no request for interpretation was made by the
Bidder prior to the bid opening.
STANDARDS
2.4.1
The articles, devices, materials, equipment, forms of construction,
fixtures and other items named in the Specifications to denote kind and
quality shall be known as Standards and all bids shall be based upon
those Standards.
2.4.2
Where two or more Standards are named, the Bidder may furnish any
one of those Standards.
2.4.3
Items which are not Standards may be used only if accepted pursuant to
the requirements of paragraph IB 2.5.
PROPOSED EQUALS
2.5.1
If the Bidder proposes to use an article, device, material, equipment,
form of construction, fixture or other item other than those Standards
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 4
4646862v1
named, the Bidder shall certify that the item is equal in quality, and all
aspects of performance and appearance, to the Standards specified.
2.5.2
2.6
In addition, the Bidder shall submit information to the Architect no later
than five (5) days prior to the bid opening, which information shall
include:
2.5.2.1
The name and a complete description of the proposed Equal,
including Drawings, performance and test data, and other
information necessary for a complete evaluation;
2.5.2.2
A statement setting forth any changes which the proposed
Equal will require in the Project.
2.5.3
If the Architect approves the proposed Equal as a Standard, the
Architect shall issue an Addendum to all Bidders.
2.5.4
If the Architect does not approve the proposed Equal, the Architect shall
inform the Bidder of the disapproval in writing, which decision shall be
final. The Architect shall have the discretion to reject a proposed Equal
for the reason that the Bidder failed to provide sufficient information to
enable the Architect to completely evaluate the proposed Equal without
delay in the scheduled bid opening.
BID FORM
2.6.1
2.6.2
Each bid shall be submitted on the Bid Form and sealed in an envelope
clearly marked as containing a bid, indicating the Project name,
Contractor’s name, and the date of the bid opening, on the envelope.
2.6.1.1
Any change, alteration or addition in the wording of the Bid
Form may cause a bid to be rejected.
2.6.1.2
Unless the Bidder withdraws the bid as provided in Article 4
hereof, the Bidder will be required to comply with all
requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether
the Bidder had actual knowledge of the requirements and
regardless of any statement or omission made by the Bidder
which might indicate a contrary intention.
The Bidder shall fill in all relevant blank spaces in the Bid Form in ink
or by typewriting and not in pencil.
2.6.2.1
The Bidder shall show all bid amounts in both words and
figures. In the case of a conflict between the words and
figures, the amount shown in words shall govern, where such
words are not ambiguous. When the Bidder's intention and the
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 5
4646862v1
meaning of the words are clear, omissions or misspellings of
words will not render the words ambiguous.
2.6.2.2
2.6.3
2.7
Any alteration or erasure of items filled in on the Bid Form
shall be initialed by the Bidder.
When an Alternate is listed on the Bid Form, the Bidder shall fill in the
applicable blank with an increased or decreased bid amount. The Owner
reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids on Alternates, in
whole or in part, and in any order.
2.6.3.1
If no change in the bid amount is required, indicate "No
Change" or $0 dollars.
2.6.3.2
A blank entry or an entry of "No Bid,” “N/A," or similar entry
on any Alternate may cause the bid to be rejected.
2.6.4
If the Bidder is a corporation, partnership or sole proprietorship, an
officer, partner or principal of the Bidder, as applicable, shall print or
type the legal name of the Bidder on the line provided and signs the Bid
Form. If the Bidder is a joint venture, an officer, partner or principal, as
applicable, of each member of the joint venture shall print or type the
legal name of the applicable member on the line provided and signs the
Bid Form. All signatures must be original.
2.6.5
The Bid Form of the Bidder with whom the Owner executes a Contract
shall be incorporated into the Contract as if fully rewritten therein.
REQUIRED SUBMITTALS WITH BID FORM
2.7.1
2.7.2
Contract Bond and Power of Attorney
2.7.1.1
The bid may be rejected if the Bidder fails to submit with the
Bid Form in a sealed envelope, the signed Bid Guaranty and
Contract Bond included in the Bid Documents(see Contract
Bond form in the Standard Conditions) or other Bid Guaranty
pursuant to paragraph IB 5.1;
2.7.1.2
The bid may be rejected if the Bidder does not submit a valid
Power of Attorney of the agent signing for the Surety;
All bidders shall submit background information using the Qualified
Bidder Information Form (QBI) and including without limitation, the
following:
2.7.2.1
Overall experience of the Bidder, including number of years in
business under present and former business names;
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 6
4646862v1
2.7.2.2
Complete listing of all ongoing and completed public and
private construction Projects of the Bidder in the last three
years, including the nature and value of each Contract and a
name/address/phone number for each Owner;
2.7.2.3
Certificate of Compliance with Affirmative Action Programs,
issued pursuant to Ohio Revised Code Section 9.47, complete
listing of any EPA, OSHA citations in the last ten (10) years;
2.7.2.4
Certified financial statement with trade and bank references;
2.7.2.5
Description of relevant facilities of the Bidder;
2.7.2.6
Description of the management experience of the Bidder’s
project manager(s) and superintendent(s);
2.7.2.7
To support a Bond, a current and signed Certificate of
Compliance issued by the Department of Insurance, showing
the Surety is licensed to do business in Ohio;
2.7.2.8
Current Ohio Workers’ Compensation Certificate;
2.7.2.9
If the Bidder is a foreign corporation, i.e., not incorporated
under the laws of Ohio, a Certificate of Good Standing from
the Secretary of State showing the right of the Bidder to do
business in the State; or, if the Bidder is a person or
partnership, the Bidder has filed with the Secretary of State a
Power of Attorney designating the Secretary of State as the
Bidder's agent for the purpose of accepting service of summons
in any action.
2.7.2.10 Subsequent to the bid opening, submit any other data or
information which the Architect, Owner’s Representative
and/or Owner may request concerning the qualifications of
the bidder, including a complete list of major
subcontractors with an estimated contract value of $5,000
or more, which the Bidder proposes to employ on the
Project;
2.8
CHANGE IN THE BID AMOUNT
2.8.1
Any change to a previously submitted bid shall be made in writing and
must be received by the Owner before the time scheduled for the bid
opening, as determined by the Owner.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 7
4646862v1
2.9
2.8.2
Changes shall not reveal the bid amount, but shall provide an amount to
be added or subtracted from the bid amount, so that the final bid amount
can be determined only after the sealed envelope is opened.
2.8.3
If the Bidder's written instruction reveals the bid amount in any way
prior to the bid opening, the bid may be rejected.
COPIES OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
2.9.1
The Owner shall furnish to the successful Contractor, free of charge, two
(2) sets of Drawings and Specifications.
2.9.2
The Contractor may obtain additional copies or sepias of the Drawings
and Specifications from the Owner, upon request, at the cost of
reproduction, if any.
ARTICLE 3 - BID OPENING AND CONSIDERATION OF BIDS
3.1
3.2
DELIVERY OF BIDS
3.1.1
It is the responsibility of the Bidder to submit the bid to the Owner prior
to the time scheduled for bid opening.
3.1.2
If the bid envelope is enclosed in another envelope for the purpose of
delivery, the exterior envelope shall be clearly marked as containing a
bid with the Project name and number, and the date of the bid opening
shown on the envelope.
3.1.3
No bid shall be considered if it arrives after the time announced for the opening of the bids.
BID OPENING
3.2.1
3.3
BID OPENING EXTENSION
3.3.1
3.4
Sealed bids will be received at the office designated in the Notice to
Bidders until the date and time stated, when all bids will be opened. Bids
will be read aloud. A tabulation of the bids opened will be made public.
The Owner reserves the rights to extend, postpone or cancel any bid
opening as it deems appropriate in the best interests of the Owner at its
sole discretion. Any such decision to exercise its rights shall be issued
to contractors holding the Project plans.
BID EVALUATION CRITERIA
3.4.1
The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, in whole
or in part, and reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Alternates.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 8
4646862v1
3.5
3.4.2
The bid of any Bidder who engages in collusive bidding shall be
rejected. The Owner may reject the bid of any Bidder who has engaged
in collusive bidding at any future bid opening.
3.4.3
The Owner reserves the right to allow any Bidder a reasonable
opportunity to cure a minor irregularity or technical deficiency in a bid,
provided the irregularity or deficiency does not affect the bid amount or
otherwise give the Bidder a competitive advantage.
3.4.4
If, in the opinion of the Owner, the award of the Contract to the lowest
Bidder is not in the best interest of the Owner, the Owner may accept, in
its discretion, another bid so opened or reject all bids, and advertise for
other bids.
BID EVALUATION PROCEDURE
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
The Contract will be awarded to the lowest and best Bidder who as
determined in the discretion of the Owner will execute the work in
accord with the best interests of the Owner. The following procedures
shall be followed by the Owner:
3.5.1.1
In determining which Bidder is the lowest, Owner shall
consider the Base Bid and any Alternate or Alternates which
the Owner determines to accept.
3.5.1.2
The total of the accepted Alternate(s) will be added to the Base
Bid for the purpose of determining the lowest Bidder.
3.5.1.3
If two Bidders submit the same bid amount and both are
determined to be qualified, the Owner reserves the right to
select one Bidder at its sole discretion which decision shall be
final.
A Bidder for a Contract shall be considered responsive if the Bidder's
bid responds to the Contract Documents in all material respects and
contains no irregularities or deviations from the Contract Documents
which would affect the amount of the bid or otherwise give the Bidder a
competitive advantage.
3.5.2.1
The bid shall be rejected as nonresponsive if the Bond is
executed by a Surety not licensed in Ohio.
3.5.2.2
If the lowest Bidder is not responsive, such Bidder shall be
notified according to paragraph IB 3.6.
In determining whether a Bidder is best for the Project, factors to be
considered include, without limitation:
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 9
4646862v1
3.5.3.1
The experience of the Bidder;
3.5.3.2
The financial condition of the Bidder;
3.5.3.3
The conduct and performance of the Bidder on previous
contracts,
3.5.3.4
The previous conduct and compliance of the Bidder with Equal
Employment Opportunity requirements;
3.5.3.5
The previous conduct and compliance of the Bidder with
prevailing wage laws;
3.5.3.6
The facilities of the Bidder;
3.5.3.7
The management skills of the Bidder;
3.5.3.8
The ability of the Bidder to understand and execute the
Contract and Bid Documents properly;
3.5.3.9
The past performance of the subcontractors that the Bidder
proposes to use on a project;
3.5.3.10 The ability of the Bidder to demonstrate a good faith effort to
engage, utilize and work in conjunction with Disadvantaged
Business Enterprises in the execution of the Work of this
Project;
3.5.3.11 The Experience Modifier Rate of the Bidder as calculated by
the Ohio Bureau of Workers’ Compensation;
3.5.3.12 The Bidder’s Incident Rate as recorded on the OSHA 300
form.
3.6
3.5.4
The Owner shall obtain from the lowest Bidder any information the
Owner deems appropriate to the consideration of factors showing
responsibility. If the lowest Bid is deemed best, in the sole discretion of
the Owner, the Contract shall be awarded to such Bidder unless all bids
are rejected.
3.5.5
If the lowest Bid is not determined best, and all bids are not rejected, the
Owner shall follow the procedure set forth in paragraph IB 3.5 with each
next lowest Bidder until the Contract is awarded, or all bids are rejected.
REJECTION OF BID BY OWNER
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 10
4646862v1
3.6.1
3.7
If the lowest Bid is determined not to be the best bid, the Owner shall
reject such bid and notify the Bidder in writing, which decision shall be
final.
NOTICE OF INTENT TO AWARD
3.7.1
The Owner shall notify the apparent successful Bidder that upon
satisfactory compliance with all conditions precedent for Contract
execution, within the time specified, the Bidder will be awarded the
Contract.
3.7.2
The Owner reserves the right to rescind any Notice of Intent to Award if
the Owner determines the Notice of Intent to Award was issued in error,
or if the Owner determines not to proceed with the Project.
ARTICLE 4 - WITHDRAWAL OF BID
4.1
WITHDRAWAL PRIOR TO BID OPENING
A Bidder may withdraw a bid after the bid has been received by the Owner,
provided the Bidder makes a request in writing and the request is
received by the Owner prior to the time of the bid opening.
4.2
WITHDRAWAL AFTER BID OPENING
4.2.1
4.2.2
All bids shall remain valid and open for acceptance for a period of, at
least, 60 days after the bid opening; provided, however, a Bidder may
withdraw a bid from consideration after the bid opening if the price bid
was substantially lower than the other bids, providing that the bid was
submitted in good faith, and the reason for the price bid being
substantially lower was a clerical mistake, as opposed to a judgment
mistake, and was actually due to an unintentional and substantial
arithmetic error or an unintentional omission of a substantial quantity of
Work, labor or material made directly in the compilation of the bid.
4.2.1.1
Notice of a request to withdraw such bid must be made in
writing filed with the Owner within two (2) business days after
the bid opening. The Owner reserves the right to request the
bidder to submit evidence substantiating the bidder’s request to
withdraw the bid.
4.2.1.2
No bid may be withdrawn under paragraph IB 4.2.1 when the
result would be the awarding the Contract on another bid to the
same Bidder.
If a bid is withdrawn under paragraph IB 4.2.1, the Owner may award
the Contract to the next lowest and best Bidder or reject all bids and
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 11
4646862v1
advertise for other bids. In the event the Owner advertises for other
bids, the withdrawing Bidder shall pay the costs, in connection with the
rebidding, of printing new Contract Documents, required advertising and
printing and mailing notices to prospective Bidders, if the Owner finds
that such costs would not have been incurred but for such withdrawal.
4.3
4.4
REFUSAL BY OWNER TO ACCEPT WITHDRAWAL
4.3.1
If the Owner intends to contest the right of the Bidder to withdraw a bid
pursuant to paragraph IB 4.2.1, a meeting shall be held within ten (10)
days after the bid opening. The Owner shall give the withdrawing
Bidder timely notice of the time and place of any such meeting. The
Bidder shall pay the costs of the hearing.
4.3.2
Within five (5) days following the meeting held pursuant to Paragraph
4.3.1, the Owner shall notify the Bidder of its decision to accept or reject
the Bidder’s request to withdraw the bid.
REFUSAL BY BIDDER TO PERFORM
4.4.1
4.5
In the event the Owner rejects the request for withdrawal and the Bidder
elects to appeal or otherwise refuses to perform the Contract, the Owner
may reject all bids or award the Contract to the next lowest and best
Bidder.
PENALTY FOR WITHDRAWAL
4.5.1
No Bidder who is permitted, pursuant to paragraph IB 4.2, to withdraw a
bid, shall for compensation supply any material or labor to, or perform
any subcontract or other work agreement for, the person to whom the
Contract is awarded or otherwise benefit, directly or indirectly, from the
performance of the Project for which the withdrawn bid was submitted,
without the written approval of the Owner.
4.5.2
The person to whom the Contract was awarded and the withdrawing
Bidder are jointly liable to the Owner in an amount equal to any
compensation paid to or for the benefit of the withdrawing Bidder
without such approval.
ARTICLE 5 - BID GUARANTY AND CONTRACT BOND
5.1
BID GUARANTY
5.1.1
The Bidder must file with the bid a Bid Guaranty, payable to the Owner,
in the form of either:
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 12
4646862v1
5.2
5.1.1.1
The signed Bid Guaranty and Contract Bond contained in the
Contract Documents, for the amount of the Base Bid plus
Alternates; or
5.1.1.2
A certified check, cashier's check or letter of credit. Any letter
of credit shall be revocable only by the Owner. The amount of
the certified check, cashier's check, or letter of credit shall be
equal to ten (10) percent of the Base Bid plus add Alternates.
5.1.2
The Bid Guaranty shall be in form and substance satisfactory to the
Owner and shall serve as an assurance that the Bidder will, upon
acceptance of the bid, comply with all conditions precedent for Contract
execution, within the time specified by the Owner.
5.1.3
If the blank line on the Bid Guaranty and Contract Bond is not filled in,
the penal sum will be the full amount of the Base Bid plus Alternates. If
the blank line is filled in, the amount must not be less than the full
amount of the Base Bid plus Alternates, stated in dollars and cents. A
percentage is not acceptable.
5.1.4
The Bond must be signed by an authorized agent, with Power of
Attorney, from a Surety. The Bond must be issued by a Surety
authorized by the Department of Insurance to transact business in Ohio.
5.1.5
Bid Guaranties will be returned to all unsuccessful Bidders 60 days after
the bid opening. If used, a certified check, cashier's check or letter of
credit will be returned to the successful Bidder upon providing the
Bond.
BOND FORFEITURE
5.2.1
If for any reason, other than as authorized by paragraph IB 4.2.1, the
Bidder fails to enter into a Contract, and the Owner awards the Contract
to the next lowest and best Bidder, the Bidder who failed to enter into a
Contract shall be liable to the Owner for the difference between such
Bidder's bid and the bid of the next lowest and best Bidder, or for a
penal sum not to exceed ten (10) percent of the bid amount, whichever is
less.
5.2.2
If the Owner then awards a Contract to such next lowest and best Bidder
and such Bidder also fails or refuses to enter into a Contract, the liability
of such next lowest and best Bidder shall be the amount of the difference
between the bid amounts of such next lowest and best Bidder and the
third lowest and best Bidder, but not in excess of the liability specified
in paragraph IB 4.2.2. Liability on account of an award to any lowest
and best Bidder beyond the third lowest and best Bidder shall be
determined in like manner.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 13
4646862v1
5.2.3
5.4
If the Owner does not award the Contract to the next lowest and best
Bidder but resubmits the Project for bidding, the Bidder failing to enter
into the Contract shall, be liable to the Owner for a penal sum not to
exceed ten (10) percent of such Bidder's bid amount or the costs in
connection with the resubmission, of printing new Contract Documents,
required advertising and printing and mailing notices to prospective
Bidders, whichever is less.
CONTRACT BOND
5.4.1
If the Bidder enters into a Contract, the Bidder shall, at the time of
signing the Contract, provide a payment and performance Bond.
5.4.2
The Bond shall be in the full amount of the Contract to indemnify the
Owner against all direct and consequential damages suffered by failure
of the Contractor to perform according to the provisions of the Contract
and in accordance with the plans, details, specifications and bills of
material thereof and to pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors, Material
Suppliers, and laborers for labor performed or materials furnished in
carrying forward, performing or completing the Contract.
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACT AWARD AND EXECUTION
6.1
6.2
CONTRACT AWARD
6.1.1
The award of the Contract is based upon the expectation that the lowest
and best Bidder will comply with all Conditions Precedent for Execution
of Contract within ten (10) days of the date of the Notice of Intent to
Award.
6.1.2
Noncompliance with the Conditions Precedent for Execution of Contract
within ten (10) days of the date of the Notice of Intent to Award shall be
cause for the Owner to cancel the Notice of Intent to Award and award
the Contract to the next lowest and best Bidder or resubmit the Contract
for bidding, at the discretion of the Owner.
6.1.3
The Owner may extend the time for submitting the Conditions Precedent
for Execution of Contract for good cause shown. No extension shall
operate as a waiver of the Conditions Precedent for Execution of
Contract.
TIME LIMITS
6.2.1
A failure to award and execute the Contract within sixty days after the
date on which the bids were opened invalidates the entire bid proceeding
and all bid submitted unless the time for awarding and executing the
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 14
4646862v1
Contract is extended by written mutual consent of the Owner or its
representative and the Bidder whose bid the Owner accepts and with
respect to whom the Owner subsequently awards and executes a
contract.
6.3
6.4
6.2.1.1
If the Contract is awarded within 60 days of the bid opening,
any increases in material, labor and subcontract costs shall be
borne by the Bidder without alteration of the amount of the bid.
6.2.1.2
If the cause of the failure to execute the Contract within 60
days of the bid opening is due to matters for which the Owner
is solely responsible, the Contractor shall be entitled to a
Change Order authorizing payment of verifiable increased
costs in materials, labor or subcontracts.
6.2.1.3
If the cause of the failure to execute the Contract within 60
days of the bid opening is due to matters for which the
Contractor is responsible, no request for increased costs will be
granted.
CONDITIONS PRECEDENT FOR EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
6.3.1
Contract Bond. To support the Bond, a Certificate of Compliance issued
by the Department of Insurance, showing the Surety is licensed to do
business in Ohio;
6.3.2
Ohio Workers' Compensation Certificate;
6.3.3
Certificate of Compliance with Affirmative Action Programs, issued by
the State Equal Opportunity Center;
6.3.4
Certificate of Insurance (ACORD form is acceptable) and copy of
additional insured endorsement. The Owner reserves the right to request
a certified copy of the Contractor's insurance policies;
6.3.5
If the Bidder is a foreign corporation, i.e., not incorporated under the
laws of Ohio, a Certificate of Good Standing from the Secretary of State
showing the right of the Bidder to do business in the State; or, if the
Bidder is a person or partnership, the Bidder has filed with the Secretary
of State a Power of Attorney designating the Secretary of State as the
Bidder's agent for the purpose of accepting service of summons in any
action brought under Ohio Revised Code Section 153.05, or under Ohio
Revised Code Sections 4123.01 to 4123.94, inclusive.
NOTICE TO PROCEED
6.4.1
The Owner shall issue the Contractor a Notice to Proceed which shall
establish the date for commencement of the Contract Completion time.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 15
4646862v1
The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of the date of the Notice to
Proceed, furnish the Owner’s Representative the following submittals:
6.5
6.4.1.1
Contract Cost Breakdown;
6.4.1.2
Preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings and Submittals;
6.4.1.3
Subcontractor's Declaration as required pursuant to Article 15
of the General Conditions;
6.4.1.4
Material Supplier’s Declaration as required pursuant to Article
15 of the General Conditions;
6.4.1.5
Outline of Qualifications of Proposed Superintendent.
PREVAILING WAGE RATES
6.5.1 The Bidder shall base its Bid upon the prevailing rates of wages as
ascertained by the Ohio Department of Commerce, Wage and Hour
Bureau for the Project as provided in Ohio Revised Code Sections
4115.03 through 4115.14. Refer to Article 18, Prevailing Wage Payroll
Submittals in the General Conditions for related information.
6.5.2 The Bidder shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum
on account of an increase in prevailing wage rates, except as otherwise
provided by Applicable Law. The Bidder is responsible for compliance of
its Subcontractors with prevailing wage requirements.
6.5.3 The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of the date of the Notice
to Proceed, provide the Owner’s Prevailing Wage Coordinator a schedule
of dates during the term of the Contract on which wages will be paid to
employees for the Project. The Contractor is notified that all prevailing
wages are provided on the Internet and it is the Contractor’s responsibility
to obtain this information at http://wagehour.bes.state.oh.us.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
IB - 16
4646862v1
City of Bexley
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
BID FORM
Project Title: City of Bexley, Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
Location of Project & County: 2242 East Main Street, Franklin County, Bexley, Ohio
43209
Name of firm submitting bid: ______________________________________________
Having read and examined the Contract Documents, including without limitation the
Drawings and Specifications, prepared by the Architect for the above-referenced Project,
and the following Addenda:
Addendum No.
Date of Receipt
The time total for Contract completion is __________________ days.
Overall Project Schedule included with the Bid – Yes ______; No ______.
Is the $5,000 floor patching/repair allowance included per Scope of Work item #33? –
Yes ______; No ______.
Is the $2,500 existing Roof Top Unit assessment allowance included per Scope of Work
item #34? – Yes______: No______.
The undersigned Bidder proposes to perform all Work for the applicable Contract, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, for the following sums:
ITEM 1.
BASE BID
ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS, for the sum of...... $ ____________
Sum in words:
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
BF - 1
ITEM 2.
Alternate #1 – Shown on the Contract Documents is an existing Roof Top
Unit. This RTU may be able to be refurbished and remain in place. This
Contractor is to complete an assessment of this RTU and submit a report. If
the Owner determines this RTU can be relocated to its new location as shown
on the Contract Documents as new RTU #3, then this Contractor shall include
a net deduct from the Base Bid which is to install a new RTU #3. This net
deduct shall include the costs to relocate the existing curb, move the existing
unit to the new location, connect power, gas, thermostat controls, etc.
All labor, & materials for the sum of.... $ ____________
___add/deduct
Sum in words:
ITEM 3.
Alternate #2 – Offices #106, #107, #108, #110, and #111 are shown to have
sliding glass wall systems on the corridor/office entrance side. In lieu of what
is shown and specified, provide fixed glass panels butt glazed together that sit
in a bottom/top track type system including the entrance door and related
hardware.
All labor, & materials for the sum of.... $ ____________
___add/deduct
Sum in words:
ITEM 4.
Alternate #3 – Offices #106, #107, #108, #110, and #111 are shown to have
sliding glass wall systems on the corridor/office entrance side. For Office
#106 in lieu of what is shown and specified, provide fixed glass panels butt
glazed together that sit in a bottom/top track type system including the
entrance door and related hardware. For Offices #107, #108, #110 and #111
there shall be no front glass panels or doors. These offices will remain open to
the corridor.
All labor, & materials for the sum of.... $ ____________
___add/deduct
Sum in words:
ITEM 5.
Alternate #4 – Delete the requirement to provide a Surety Bond.
All labor, & materials for the sum of.... $ ____________
___add/deduct
Sum in words:
ITEM 6.
Alternate #5 – Provide the costs for your firm to provide the Builder’s Risk
Policy for this Project.
All labor, & materials for the sum of.... $ ____________
General Contractor
___add/deduct
June 24, 2014
BF - 2
Sum in words:
ITEM 7.
Alternate #6 – The Base Bid shall include only the required work to rough in
for the plumbing, electrical in Room #103A. Provide an alternate price to
install all finishes, fixtures, etc. per the Contract Documents. See Scope of
Work item #40 for a description of what should be included in your Base Bid.
Please note that P-1 refers to this Alternate as #7. There is no Alternate #7.
All labor, & materials for the sum of.... $ ____________
___add/deduct
Sum in words:
BIDDER'S CERTIFICATION
The Bidder hereby acknowledges that the following representations in this bid are
material and not mere recitals:
1.
Bidder has read and understands the Contract Documents and agrees to comply
with all requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether the
Bidder has actual knowledge of the requirements and regardless of any statement
or omission made by the Bidder which might indicate a contrary intention.
2.
The Bidder represents that the bid is based upon the Standards specified by the
Contract Documents.
3.
Bidder has visited the Project site, become familiar with local conditions and has
correlated personal observations about the requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Bidder has no outstanding questions regarding the interpretation
or clarification of the Contract Documents.
4.
Bidder understands that the award of separate Contracts for the Project will
require sequential, coordinated and interrelated operations which may involve
interference, disruption, hindrance or delays in the progress of the Bidder's Work.
The Bidder agrees that the Contract price, as amended from time to time, shall
cover all amounts due from the Owner resulting from interference, disruption,
hindrance or delay caused by or between Contractors or their agents and
employees. The Bidder agrees that any such interference, disruption, hindrance
or delay is within the contemplation of the Bidder and the Owner.
5.
The Bidder and each person signing on behalf of the Bidder certifies, and in the
case of a joint or combined bid, each party thereto certifies as to such party's
organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of the undersigned's
knowledge and belief: (a) the Base Bid, any Unit Prices and any Alternate Bid in
the bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation,
communication or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition as to any
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
BF - 3
matter relating to such Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid with any other
Bidder; (b) unless otherwise required by law, the Base Bid, any Unit Prices and
any Alternate bid in the bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the Bidder and
will not knowingly be disclosed by the Bidder prior to the bid opening, directly or
indirectly, to any other Bidder who would have any interest in the Base Bid, Unit
Prices or Alternate bid; (c) no attempt has been made or will be made by the
Bidder to induce any other individual, partnership or corporation to submit or not
to submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition.
6.
Bidder understands that the Contract is subject to all the provisions, duties,
obligations, remedies and penalties of Chapter 4115, of the Ohio Revised Code,
"Wages and Hours on Public Works," and that the Bidder shall pay any wage
increase in the locality during the term of the Contract.
7.
Bidder will enter into and execute the Contract with the Owner, if a Contract is
awarded on the basis of this bid, and if the Bidder does not execute a Contract for
any reason, other than as authorized by the Contract Document, the Bidder and
the Bidder's Surety are liable to the Owner as provided in the Instructions to
Bidders.
8.
Bidder certifies that upon the award of a Contract, the Contractor will make a
good faith effort to ensure that all of the Contractor’s employees, while working
on the Project, will not purchase, transfer, use or possess illegal drugs or alcohol
or abuse prescription drugs in any way.
9.
Bidder agrees to furnish any information requested by the Architect, Owner’s
Representative or Owner to evaluate the qualifications of the Bidder.
If the Bidder is a corporation, partnership or sole proprietorship, an officer, partner or
principal of the Bidder, as applicable, shall print or type the legal name of the Bidder on
the line provided and signs the Bid Form. If the Bidder is a joint venture, an officer,
partner or principal, as applicable, each member of the joint venture shall print or type
the legal name of the applicable member on the line provided and signs the Bid Form.
BIDDER SIGNATURE AND INFORMATION
Bidder’s Authorized Signature:
Please print or type the following:
Name of Bidder’s Authorized Signatory
Title:
Company Name:
Mailing Address:
Telephone Number:
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
BF - 4
Facsimile Number:
E-Mail Address:
Where Incorporated:
Federal Tax Identification Number:
Date enrolled in an OBWC-approved DFWP (month/date/year): __________ / __________ /
Contact person for Contract processing:
President or Primary Officer Name and Title:
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
BF - 5
City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
SUMMARY OF WORK
GENERAL
The following scope of work is intended to be general in nature. The intention is to have
the Contractor perform all related work shown on the Contract Documents other than
those items specifically indicated below to be excluded. Attention is called to the
“Special Instructions” for additional information. The Summary of Work takes
precedence over the drawings and specifications in the event of a conflict in trade
assignment or responsibility.
SCOPE OF WORK
Provide all necessary equipment, labor, and materials necessary to perform the General
Trades and related work as shown on the Contract Documents for the Project. This work
shall include, but not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
This is not a multiple prime contracting project. As such the General
Contractor is responsible to manage and coordinate all on site activities. The
General Contractor is responsible to develop a detailed Construction
Schedule, oversee the coordination process, conduct weekly job meetings,
coordinate inspections and manage the Work to ensure completion of the
Project on schedule.
The General Contractor shall submit with its Bid a copy of their proposed
work sequence and schedule. This schedule should show the general activities
for the Project and anticipated flow of the work through to Owner occupancy
and close out.
The Owner has pre-purchased certain finishes, equipment and other items.
The Contractor shall review the Matrix of Responsibilities shown on A-1 for
clarification of these items. The Contractor shall include all labor to install the
items being provided by the Owner. The Owner is providing all of the
necessary materials for the items shown such as the adhesive for the carpet,
etc. The Contractor shall receive and inspect all items provided by the Owner
and immediately notify the Owner and Architect of any missing components,
damaged elements or incorrectly procured items. Once received by the
Contractor, these pre-purchased items will be the responsibility of the
Contractor to store in an acceptable condition for installation at a later date.
THIS IS A PREVAILING WAGE PROJECT. This Contractor shall ensure
the submission of all required documentation during the course of the Project.
If proper documentation is not received with each Pay Application, the
processing of a given Pay Application can be delayed.
THIS PROJECT IS TAX EXEMPT.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
SOW-BP1-1
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Within five (5) days following the Notice To Proceed the Contractor shall
provide the Owner with a final list of sub-contractors/suppliers and shall
submit an updated, detailed Project Schedule outlining a step by step sequence
of the Work listing construction activities, delivery of materials including
long lead items, inspections, turnover, punchlist, occupancy and close out.
The City of Bexley is completing the interior demolition of the current space.
It is expected that the City of Bexley will leave a cold, dark shell with all
interior elements removed. There will be minimal lighting installed. The
Contractor will need to provide additional lighting beyond the minimum
provided by the City of Bexley.
The Contractor is responsible for all work shown and indicated on the
Contract Documents including but not limited to concrete, general trades,
roofing, masonry, storefront, miscellaneous metals, canopies, mechanical,
electrical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, etc.
All wood blocking, rough carpentry, finish carpentry, sealants, miscellaneous
metals, doors and frames, door hardware, finish hardware, gypsum board
systems, wall base, flooring, concrete, sidewalks, acoustical ceilings, and fire
extinguishers/cabinets including all accessories as specified and/or required.
All doors, frames and door hardware as specified including all accessories,
cores, keys, etc.
All coordination of keying with the Owner and Architect as required.
Cylinders and cores to be coordinated with the Owner.
Permanent cores shall be provided by the Owner to the General Contractor for
installation by the General Contractor. Include multiple comebacks for core
installation.
Include all steel angles, columns, supports, framing, canopies, and bracing
work as shown and/or required by the Contract Drawings and specifications.
All caulking and sealants shown or specified within or adjacent to the work of
this contract, including where the work of this contract abuts dissimilar
materials.
Provide and install any blocking required to complete the work of this
Contract. Provide fire treated wood blocking.
This Contractor shall provide and install the backer board for the electrical
panels if shown on the Electrical Drawings. This shall be painted with a fire
retardant paint.
Provide a full-time competent and experienced Superintendent/Foreman at the
project site for the duration of the project. The Superintendent/Foreman shall
be trained in the recognition of OSHA Safety Hazards, shall have completed
OSHA 30 hour training within the last two (2) years, be First Aid and CPR
certified. This Superintendent/Foreman shall be responsible for each of the
subcontractors under this contract and shall enforce all safety policies and
OSHA guidelines. This person shall be responsible for the coordination of the
suppliers and subcontractors under this contract. It shall be understood that
the Superintendent/Foreman shall be the same person throughout the duration
of the project, and this person’s hours are to be included in the base bid. If
there is any work or deliveries going on at the site it is required that this
Superintendent/Foreman shall be present to coordinate the work and delivery
activities. This includes overtime and weekend work or deliveries.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
SOW-BP1-2
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining a Daily Construction
Report. Copies of this report must be made available to the Architect and/or
Owner upon request.
Furnish and install two (2) 55-gallon trash cans, labeled as “trash cans”, with
removable lids on chains connected to the trash cans, around the project site.
Include emptying these cans as required for the duration of the project.
Remove at the completion of the project.
Provide a dumpster on site. Include all costs associated with the rental,
emptying and removal for the duration of the Project. No construction debris
is to be put in the Owner’s or any Tenant’s dumpster(s). The protection of the
paved areas where this dumpster will be located is required.
This Contractor is to provide temporary toilets at the rear of the building
complex for all Contractors on this project to use.
Provide final cleaning. This shall include vacuuming, mopping and/or wiping
down all floor surfaces, all fixtures, equipment, walls and all horizontal and
vertical surfaces until clean. The Owner and Architect shall inspect and
approve all areas that have been final cleaned. Any final cleaning done
without the concurrence of the Owner shall be subject to re-cleaning at no
additional cost.
This Contractor shall provide 20 lb. ABC fire extinguishers and support
stands according to OSHA standards (including signage) during the
construction period. This Contractor is to distribute the extinguishers
throughout the building/space as required and inspect them daily and recharge
as required.
When setting doorframes, spreaders and bucks must be used in order to
minimize frame movement during wall installation.
Coordinate, schedule deliveries, receive, unload, distribute, store, protect and
install all items furnished under this contract to the jobsite, as well as,
coordination of all major deliveries to the jobsite by sub-contractors.
This Contractor shall provide and install all new fire extinguishers and
cabinets required for the Project.
This Contractor shall remove all existing drywall to allow for installation of
all mechanical, electrical, fire alarm devices, wood blocking required and any
other work required by this contract as well as to allow for inspection of this
work.
Temporary power and lighting shall be provided by this Contractor. The
consumables for this power are being paid for by the Owner.
This Contractor shall provide and install all required painting as noted on the
Contract Documents.
This Contractor shall complete all exterior renovations including the
demolition of storefronts, removal of planting areas, etc. as shown or
indicated on the Contract Documents.
Hail screens are required to be installed with the two new Roof Top Units
being installed.
This Contractor shall mark the ceiling grid in all locations where existing and
new piping, water lines, gas lines, etc. have valve locations above. This
Contractor shall select a grid marking system that is acceptable to the Owner
and Architect.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
SOW-BP1-3
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
This Contractor shall complete all HVAC air balancing of the system prior to
occupancy.
Include in your bid an allowance for floor patching/repairs of $5,000. This
allowance is for the use of the Owner at the Owner’s direction to repair any
abnormally damaged areas or cracks to the existing concrete floor. This
allowance does not cover normal, minor floor preparation or minor cracking
as well as any damage by this Contractor during the execution of the work
shown on the Contract Documents. All overhead and profit shall be included
in the base bid and shall not be added to the allowance as it is used.
This Contractor shall perform a complete assessment of the existing Roof Top
Units. The purpose of this assessment is to determine the current operating
status of the units and assess what it would cost to refurbish each existing
unit. This report is to be provided within five (5) business days after the
Notice To Proceed is issued. This Contractor shall include a $2,500 allowance
in their Bid for the assessment and issuance of the report/information. From
this report the Owner will determine what if any existing units can be left in
place. This Contractor shall include in their Bid all costs as shown and
indicated on the Contract Documents to completely replace the existing units
with new units.
The Contract Documents have been submitted to the State of Ohio Plans
Examiner for review/approval. Building Permits are expected to be issued in
advance of bids being received.
A series of exterior existing condition photos have been included with the
Contract Documents for your use and reference.
This Contractor is cautioned that there are existing businesses in the area
where this Project will take place. An approved site utilization plan showing
access, gates, fencing, etc. must be provided for review and approval prior to
commencing work on site. This Contractor must be cognizant during all work
to be performed on site to not impact the daily operations of the businesses in
the area including affecting access, parking, egress, noise, dirt, etc. The safety
and well being of employees, customers and the general public of the area
business must be paramount to this Contractor at all times.
This Contractor shall complete a Pre-Mobilization existing condition survey
including photos of all pavement, curbs, retaining walls, alleys, roof
conditions, parking lot conditions, adjacent spaces/businesses, etc. before any
work takes place on site.
The Contract Documents show the finished details for Room #103A. The
Base Bid is to include only constructing this room to a “white box” condition.
In other words, the finished electrical, mechanical, plumbing components
shall be rough in below grade and in the walls, but will be capped. No
fixtures, outlets, or other finishes will be installed in this room. The floor will
be bare concrete. The walls will have drywall installed and the in-wall
inspections completed. Plumbing lines will be capped and/or valved off at the
floor/wall. Electrical outlets will be roughed in with no wire pulled and have a
blank cover plate installed. There will be a single utility room light fixture
installed off the lighting circuit for the room that will be operated by a switch
as shown. There will be no finishes, paint, etc. installed in this room. The
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
SOW-BP1-4
finished door and related hardware will be installed. Please reference
Alternate #6, Item #7 from the Bid Form.
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
1.
The Fire Protection, HVAC, Electrical, Fire Alarm sub-contractors shall
coordinate their work. NOTE: it is imperative that this coordination begin
immediately after contract award. The details of sequencing and timing of
this process will be discussed immediately after contract award.
2.
The contract price shall not be altered for any work that could have been
reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents. The following items are
listed as examples of the intent of this statement, but is not limited to these
items alone:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Variations to avoid interference and obstructions.
Providing all components and services usually supplied with a specific
system.
The providing of all necessary equipment and appurtenances, whether
shown or not, for a complete operating system in strict code
compliance based on equipment and fixtures indicated on the Contract
Documents.
Testing performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents to meet the needs of the construction schedule and to not
delay the work of other trades.
3.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves, forms, and inserts for its
work before walls, partitions, are built. The cutting, drilling, etc. of metal
deck and concrete as required to install the work and the reinforcement of the
deck as required by the structural drawings to be included in this work.
4.
Not Used.
5.
Not Used.
6.
Not Used.
7.
All field measurements necessary to ensure proper fit, including the awareness
of adjacent work and finishes as they affect the installation of this work are
the responsibility of this Contractor.
8.
Any roof or floor protection required for the movement of workmen or
equipment is to be included.
9.
All equipment supports, pipe hangers, bracing, etc. required for the
performance of this work are to be included.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
SOW-BP1-5
10.
A special effort is to be made to provide the necessary protection to keep oil
(from lifts, pipe threaders, equipment, etc.) off of all floors, sidewalks and
parking areas. The Contractor will be responsible for any clean-up required
due to inadequate protection.
11.
The Contractor is responsible for all curbs, blocking, thimbles, counter
flashings, clamping rings, sealants, etc., required at roof penetrations of piping
or equipment covered by this work.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
SOW-BP1-6
City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
STANDARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
Qualified Bidder Information Form
Attach additional sheets as needed.
1. Company Name _______________________________________________________
Company Address______________________________________________________
Company Telephone Number (w/ Area Code) (________)_____________________
Company E-Mail Address _______________________________________________
2. Indicate the overall experience of the bidder performing the trades bid including the
years in business performing the trade under present and former business names.
3. The apparent low Bidder shall submit, upon request of the Owner, either:
a)
An annual financial statement prepared within the twelve (12) months
prior to the Bid by an independent licensed accounting firm; and the
name, address, contact person and phone number of the bank normally
used by the Bidder for its banking; or,
b)
A financial report generated within 30 days prior to the Bid from
Standard and Poors, Dun and Bradstreet or a similar company
documenting the financial condition of the Bidder; and the name,
address, contact person and phone number of the bank normally used by
the Bidder for its banking;
This information is not a public record; and will remain confidential, except
under proper order of a court.
4. Indicate the facilities and major equipment of the bidders (leased or owned).
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
QBI-1
5. List all projects, their Owners and Architects, including contact persons and phone
numbers, Contract amount, form of contract (General Contract, Negotiated GMP, CM
Agency) etc. completed in the last 4 years which are similar in cost and type to the
project being bid.
6. Indicate all occurrences of the following in the last 4 years (if none, so state). For
verification by the state, attach documentation, and/or provide sufficient and
appropriate detail information such as: Project name, Owner, contact person and
phone number, Contract amount, etc.
a) Prevailing Wage violations or judgements
b) Affirmative Action conduct and performance in the last four (4) years.
c) Equal Employment Opportunity conduct and performance in the last four (4)
years.
d) Contract abandonment, Contract termination or Surety takeover
e) Debarment by state, federal or local jurisdictions
f) OSHA violations and OSHA recordable incidents (OSHA 300 form) in the last
four (4) years.
g) Experience Modifier Rate for the previous four (4) years.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
QBI-2
h) Liquidated damages assessed
7. Management. Identify individuals assigned to this project.
Principal ____________________________________ Years with firm _______
Total Exp. _______
Project Manager _______________________________ Years with firm _______
Total Exp. _______
Superintendent _______________________________ Years with firm _______
Total Exp. _______
CPM Scheduler _______________________________ Years with firm _______
Total Exp. _______
8. I hereby certify that the information above is factual and complete.
Company Name ______________________________________________________
Authorized Official (please print or type) __________________________________
Signature of Authorized Official ____________________________ Date ________
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
QBI-3
CONTRACT FOR BEXLEY CITY HALL RENOVATION PROJECT
This Agreement is made as of the date set forth below between the City of Bexley, acting by and through the Mayor, and the
Contractor in connection with the Project.
Project Number:
Project Name:
Site Address:
Owner:
Owner’s Representative:
Address:
Contractor:
Contractor’s Principal Contact:
Address:
Architect/Engineer (“A/E”):
A/E’s Principal Contact:
Address:
«insert project number»
Bexley Square-City Hall Renovation
2232 East Main Street
Bexley, Ohio 43209
City of Bexley
Ben Kessler, Mayor
2242 East Main Street
Bexley, Ohio 43209
«insert name»
«insert name»
«insert street address»
«insert city, state zip code»
GRA+D Architects
Andrew Rosenthal, P.E.
330 West Spring Street
Suite #355, Columbus, Ohio 43215
ARTICLE 1 - SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 The Contractor shall perform and provide the entire Work described in the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable
by the Contractor as necessary to produce the results intended by the Contract Documents for the Bexley Square – City Hall
Renovation Project (“Project”).
ARTICLE 2 - COMPENSATION
2.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum for the Contractor’s proper, timely, and complete performance of
the Contract. The Contract Sum is $«insert amount», subject to Modifications as provided in the Contract Documents. The
Contract Sum is comprised of the following:
2.1.1 Base Bid: ..................................................... $«Insert Base Bid Amount»
2.1.2 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
2.1.3 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
2.1.4 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
2.1.5 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
2.2 The Contract Amount shall be paid in current funds by the Owner upon payment applications submitted by the Contractor
and approved by the Owner as provided in the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT TIMES
3.1
The Contractor shall diligently prosecute and complete all Work in accordance with the Construction Schedule such
that Substantial Completion occurs on or before XXXXXXXX. Unless an extension of time is granted by the Owner
in accordance with the Contract Documents the period of time established in this paragraph is referred to as the time
for Contract Completion.
3.2
Time is of the essence for this Project. All Work to be performed under the Contract shall be completed within the
established Contract Completion time and that each applicable portion of the Work shall be completed upon the
Page 1 of 4
4647968v1
«insert project number»
City Hall Renovation Project
respective Milestone Completion Date, unless the Contractor timely requests and the Owner grants an extension of
time in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.3
Failure to complete all Work within the period of time specified, or failure to have the applicable portion of the
Work completed upon any Milestone Completion Date, shall entitle the Owner to retain or recover from the
Contractor, as Liquidated Damages, and not as a penalty, the applicable amount set forth in the following table for
each and every calendar day thereafter until Contract Completion or the date of completion of the applicable portion
of the Work, unless the Contractor timely requests and the Owner grants an extension of time in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Liquidated Damages are applicable to milestone completion date(s) only when so stated in the
Special Conditions. The amount of Liquidated Damages is agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the
Owner because of the impracticality and extreme difficulty of ascertaining the actual amount of damage the Owner
would sustain.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Contract Amount
Dollars Per Day
MORE THAN $500,000. to $2,000,000.
$1,000.
3.4 The Contract Times are the periods of time established in the following table for the achievement of the associated
Milestones:
Construction Stage Milestone(s)
to which Liquidated Damages apply
Contract Time
Projected Date
(as of the date of
this Agreement)
«insert description of interim milestone – add more rows if
necessary – delete if none»
«insert number of
calendar days» days
«insert date»
Substantial Completion of all Work
«insert number of
calendar days» days
«insert date»
ARTICLE 4 - KEY PERSONNEL
4.1 The Contractor’s Key Personnel for the Project are:
4.1.1 «insert name», Project Manager;
4.1.2 «insert name», Lead Scheduling Engineer;
4.1.3 «insert name», General Superintendent.
ARTICLE 5 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
5.1 Effectiveness.
5.1.1 It is expressly understood by the Contractor that none of the rights, duties, and obligations described in the Contract
Documents shall be valid and enforceable unless the Bexley City Auditor first certifies that funds required for the
Contract are in the City’s treasury or in the process of collection, and funds have been appropriated by Bexley City
Council for the specified purpose and remain unencumbered.
5.1.2 Subject to Section 5.1.1, the Contract shall become binding and effective upon execution by the Contractor, the
Mayor, the Auditor, and approved as to form and correctness by the City Attorney.
5.1.3 This Agreement may be executed in several counterparts, each of which shall constitute a complete original
Agreement, which may be introduced in evidence or used for any other purpose without production of any other
counterparts.
Page 2 of 4
«insert project number»
City Hall Renovation Project
5.1.4 The Contract Documents embody the entire understanding of the parties and form the basis of the Contract between
the Owner and the Contractor. The Contract Documents shall be considered to be incorporated by reference into this
Contract as if fully rewritten herein.
5.1.5 The Contract and any modification, amendments or alterations thereto shall be governed, construed and enforced
by and under the laws of the State of Ohio.
5.1.6 If any term or provision of the Contract, or the application thereof to any person or circumstance, is finally
determined, to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of the Contract or the
application of such term or provision to other persons or circumstances, shall not be affected thereby, and each term
and provision of the Contract shall be valid and enforced to the fullest extent permitted by law.
5.1.7 The Contract shall be binding on the Contractor and the Owner, their successors and assigns, in respect to all
covenants and obligations contained in the Contract Documents, but the Contract may not be assigned by the
Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner in its sole discretion.
5.1.8 The Owner shall have the right to assign this Contract to any development entity that undertakes to own and
develop the Project to which this Contract relates, provided that the assignee has the ability to fulfill the obligations
of this Contract and accepts all of the Owner’s obligations set forth herein. Upon any assignment, and the
assumption by the assignee of the Owner’s obligations herein, the Owner shall automatically be released and
relieved from all obligation and liability arising hereunder from and after the date of such assignment.
AUDITOR’S CERTIFICATION
This signature certifies the amount required to meet the obligation in the fiscal year in which this Agreement is made has
been lawfully appropriated for such purpose and is in the treasury or in process of collection to the credit of an appropriate
fund free from any previous encumbrances.
Signature
William Harvey
City of Bexley Auditor
SIGNATURES
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date set forth below:
«INSERT CONTRACTOR’S NAME»
CITY OF BEXLEY
Signature
Signature
Ben Kessler
Printed Name
Mayor of City of Bexley
Title
Page 3 of 4
«insert project number»
City Hall Renovation Project
BEXLEY CITY ATTORNEY
Approval as to Form:
Signature
Signature
Louis J. Chodosh
William Harvey
Bexley City Attorney
City of Bexley Auditor
Date
END OF DOCUMENT
Page 4 of 4
City of Bexley
STANDARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FORM OF BID GUARANTY AND CONTRACT BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENT, that we, the undersigned
as Principal at
(Address) and
as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the Science & Technology Campus
Corporation as Obligee in the penal sum of the dollar amount of the bid submitted by the
Principal to the Obligee on (date)
to undertake the Project known as: City of Bexley, Bexley Square – City Hall
Renovation Project.
The penal sum, referred to herein, shall be the dollar amount of the Principal's bid
to the Obligee, incorporating any additive alternate Bids made by the Principal on the
date referred to above to the Obligee, which are accepted by the Obligee. In no case shall
the penal sum exceed the amount of dollars ($
). (If the above
line is left blank, the penal sum will be the full amount of the Principal's bid, including
add alternates. Alternatively, if completed, the amount stated must not be less than the
full amount of the bid, including alternates, in dollars and cents. A percentage is not
acceptable.) For the payment of the penal sum well and truly to be made, we hereby
jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns.
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the
above-named Principal has submitted a bid on the above-referred to project;
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee accepts the bid of the Principal, and the
Principal fails to enter into a proper contract in accordance with the Contract bid, Plans,
Specifications, detail and bills of material; and in the event the Principal pays to the
Obligee the difference not to exceed ten percent of the penal sum hereof between the
amount specified in the bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good
faith contract with the Bidder determined by the Obligee to be the next lowest responsive
and responsible to perform the Work covered by the bid; or in the event the Obligee does
not award the Contract to such next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder and
resubmits the project for bidding, the Principal pays to the Obligee the difference not to
exceed ten percent of the penal sum hereof between the amount specified in the bid, or
the costs, in connection with the resubmission, of printing new Contract Documents,
required advertising and printing and mailing notices to prospective Bidders, whichever
is less, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and
effect. If the Obligee accepts the bid of the Principal, and the Principal, within ten days
after the awarding of the Contract, enters into a proper Contract and executes the
Contract Form in accordance with the Contract Documents, including without limitation,
General Contractor
CB - 1
June 24, 2014
the bid, Plans, Specifications, details and bills of material, which said Contract is made a
part of this Bond the same as though set forth herein; and
NOW ALSO, IF THE SAID Principal shall well and faithfully perform each and
every condition of such Contract; and indemnify the Obligee against all damage suffered
by failure to perform such Contract according to the provisions thereof and in accordance
with the Contract Documents, including without limitations the Plans, Specifications,
Details and bills of material therefore; and shall pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors,
Material Suppliers and laborers for labor performed and materials furnished in the
carrying forward, performing or completing of said Contract; we, agreeing and assenting
that this undertaking shall be for the benefit of any Subcontractor, Material Suppliers or
laborer having a just claim, as well as for the Obligee herein; then this obligation shall be
void; otherwise the same shall remain in full force and effect; it being expressly
understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder
shall in no event exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
THE SAID Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions
or additions, in or to the terms of said Contract, the Work thereunder or the Contract
Documents, including without limitations the Plans and Specifications, therefore, shall in
any way affect the obligations of said Surety on its bond, and it does hereby waive notice
of any such modifications, omissions or additions to the terms of the Contract, the Work
or the Contract Documents, including without limitation the Plans and Specifications..
SIGNED AND SEALED this
day of
, 20
.
PRINCIPAL:
By:
Title:
SURETY:
SURETY INFORMATION:
Street
By:
Attorney-in-Fact
City
State
Zip
Telephone
SURETY AGENT'S INFORMATION:
Agency Name
Street
City
State
Zip
Telephone
General Contractor
CB - 2
June 24, 2014
City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
STANDARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Article 1
Article 2
Article 3
Article 4
Article 5
Article 6
Article 7
Article 8
Article 9
Article 10
Article 11
Article 12
Article 13
Article 14
Article 15
Article 16
Article 17
Article 18
Article 19
General Provisions
The Contractor
The Architect
Construction Phase Coordination
Owner’s Rights and Responsibilities
Time
Changes in the Work
Dispute Resolution Procedure
Contractor Payment
Final Inspection and Acceptance
Contract Completion
Insurance
Contract Termination
Shop Drawings and Samples
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers
Indemnification
Audits and Records
Prevailing Wage Payroll Submittals
Miscellaneous
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1
APPLICATION AND GOVERNING LAW
1.1.1
The Contractor, the Architect, Owner and the Owner shall be
familiar with all provisions of the Standard Conditions of Contract
for Construction.
1.1.2
There shall be no change in the Standard Conditions unless so
provided in the Special Conditions.
1.1.3
The parties to the Contract shall comply with all applicable federal,
State and local codes, statutes, ordinances and regulations in the
performance of the Work of the Project.
1.1.4
The Franklin County, Ohio shall have exclusive jurisdiction over any
action or proceeding concerning the Contract and performance
thereunder. Any such action or proceeding arising out of or related
in any way to the Contract or performance thereunder shall be
brought only in the courts of Franklin County, Ohio and the
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 1
4648000v1
Contractor irrevocably consents to such jurisdiction. The Contract
shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Ohio.
1.2
1.1.5
Other rights and responsibilities of the Contractor, the Architect,
Owner and the Owner are set forth throughout the Contract
Documents and are included under different titles, articles and
paragraphs for convenience.
1.1.6
Any requirement which obligates the Contractor shall be required for
each Subcontractor and Material Supplier of the Contractor.
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
1.2.1
Nondiscrimination
1.2.1.1
During the performance of the Contract, the Contractor
agrees that in the hiring of employees for the performance
of Work, including without limitation Work to be
performed by a Subcontractor, no Contractor or
Subcontractor, and no person acting on behalf of the
Contractor or Subcontractor, shall, by reason of race,
religion, national origin, age, sex, disability, Veteran
status, or color, discriminate against any citizen in the
employment of labor or workers who are qualified and
available to perform the Work to which the employment
relates.
1.2.1.2
The Contractor further agrees that no Contractor or
Subcontractor, and no person acting on behalf of the
Contractor or Subcontractor, shall, in any manner,
discriminate against or intimidate any employee hired for
the performance of Work on account of race, religion,
national origin, age, sex, disability, Veteran status or
color.
1.2.1.3
The Contractor agrees that the Contractor will fully
cooperate with the State/City Equal Opportunity
Coordinator, with any other official or agency of the
State, City or federal government which seeks to
eliminate unlawful employment discrimination, and with
all other State, City and federal efforts to assure equal
employment practices under the Contract.
1.2.1.4
In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the
nondiscrimination clauses, the Contract may be
terminated or suspended in whole or in part, and the
Contractor may be declared not qualified for further
contracts with the Owner.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 2
4648000v1
1.2.2
Hiring Under the Owner Contracts
1.2.2.1
1.2.3
Any provision of a hiring hall contract or agreement
which obligates a Contractor to hire, if available, only
such employees as are referred to the Contractor by a
labor organization shall be void as against public policy
and unenforceable with respect to employment under any
Owner contract unless, at the date of execution of such
hiring hall contract or agreement, or within 30 days
thereafter, such labor organization has in effect
procedures for referring qualified employees for hire
without regard to race, religion, national origin, age, sex,
disability, Veteran status, color, or ancestry and unless
such labor organization includes in its apprentice and
journeymen membership, or otherwise has available for
job referral without discrimination, qualified employees.
Prevailing Wages
1.2.3.1
The Contractor shall pay the prevailing wage rates of the
Project locality, as determined by the Ohio Bureau of
Employment Services, Wage and Hour Division, to
laborers and mechanics performing Work on the Project.
1.2.3.2
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions, duties,
obligations, and is subject to the remedies and penalties of
Ohio Revised Code Chapter 4115, “Wages and Hours on
Public Works.”
1.2.3.3
The Owner shall, within seven (7) working days after
receipt of a notice of a change in prevailing wage rates,
notify the Contractor of the wage rates or where the wage
rates are available on the Internet. The Contractor shall
access the Ohio Bureau of Employment Services, Wage &
Hour Division at http://wagehour.bes.state.oh.us/ to obtain
the rates. The Contractor shall make the necessary
adjustment in the prevailing wage rate and pay any wage
increase during the term of the Contract.
1.2.3.4
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Prevailing
Wage coordinator certified payroll reports and other
required information in conformance with Ohio Revised
Code Section 4115.071. Lack of proper and timely
information can delay the processing of monthly Payment
Applications.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 3
4648000v1
1.2.4
1.3
1.2.4.1
Pursuant to Ohio Revised Code Section 1311.252, the
Owner shall prepare a Notice of Commencement in
affidavit form identifying the name and address of the
public authority, the name, address and trade of all
Contractors, the date of execution of the Contracts, and
the name and address of the Surety for each Contractor, in
addition to the name and address of the Owner upon
whom a Claim Affidavit may be served.
1.2.4.2
The Notice of Commencement shall be made available
upon request.
The unavailability of a Notice of
Commencement or incorrect information in the Notice of
Commencement does not adversely affect the right of
claimants, pursuant to Ohio Revised Code Section
1311.252(C).
GIVING NOTICE
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
Notice of Commencement
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the
giving of any notice, such notice shall be deemed to have been
validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the company or organization for whom the notice is intended, or if
delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid,
to the last business address of such individual or company known to
the giver of the notice.
1.3.1.1
All notices provided to the Contractor from the Architect
Owner shall be copied to the Owner.
1.3.1.2
All notices provided to the Contractor from the Owner
shall be copied to the Architect. Owner
1.3.1.3
All notices provided to the Architect Owner from the
Contractor shall be copied to the Owner.
1.3.1.4
All notices provided to the Owner from the Contractor
shall be copied to the Architect. Owner
When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by
days, it shall be computed to exclude the first and include the last day
of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday,
Sunday or a legal holiday, such day will be omitted from the
computation and such period shall be deemed to end on the next
succeeding day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or legal holiday.
USE OF FACSIMILE TRANSMISSION
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 4
4648000v1
1.4.1
1.5
Any notice required to be given shall be effective if provided by
facsimile transmission, but such notice shall not be considered
official until the original signed document is delivered pursuant to
paragraph GC 1.3.1.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.5.1
1.5.2
Intent
1.5.1.1
The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all
items necessary for the proper execution and completion
of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents
are complementary, and what is required by one shall be
as binding as if required by all. The Contractor shall be
held to provide all labor and materials necessary for the
entire completion of the Work described in the Contract
Documents and reasonably implied there from to produce
the intended results.
1.5.1.2
The Drawings shall generally govern dimensions, details
and locations of the Work. The Specifications shall
generally govern quality of materials and workmanship.
1.5.1.3
The organization of the Specifications in
sections and articles, and the arrangement of
shall not control the Contractor in dividing
among Subcontractors or in establishing the
Work to be performed by any trade.
1.5.1.4
In the event of inconsistencies within or between the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide the
better quality or greater quantity of Work, and shall
comply with the stricter requirement.
1.5.1.5
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents,
words which have well-known technical or construction
industry meanings are used in accordance with such
recognized meanings.
Interpretation
1.5.2.1
If the Contractor finds any perceived conflict, error,
omission or discrepancy on or between the Drawings and
Specifications, or any of the Contract Documents, the
Contractor, before proceeding with the Work, shall
submit a written request to the Architect, with a copy to
the Owner, for an interpretation or clarification. The
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 5
4648000v1
divisions,
Drawings
the Work
extent of
Contractor shall be responsible for the prompt delivery of
such request to the Owner.
1.6
1.5.2.2
The Architect, with a copy to the Owner, shall respond in
writing, within three (3) days of receipt of the request, to
any and all requests for interpretation of the Contract
Documents.
1.5.2.3
Any interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents made by any person other than the Architect
or Owner, or in any manner other than writing, shall not
be binding and the Contractor shall not rely upon any
such interpretation or clarification.
1.5.2.4
If any change to the Work is made to accommodate
unforeseen circumstances, the Architect shall initiate the
appropriate action and notify the Owner.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
1.6.1
1.6.2
Ownership
1.6.1.1
All Drawings and Specifications are the property of the
Architect to which the Owner has a non-exclusive license
to use, copy and reproduce in connection with the Project.
1.6.1.2
In making copies of the Drawings and Specifications
available, neither the Architect nor the Owner confers a
license or grants permission for any use other than Work
on the Project.
Access
1.6.2.1
The Contractor shall maintain a set of the Construction
Documents and Project records at a secure location at the
Project.
1.6.2.2
The Contractor shall maintain in good order at the Project
site one (1) copy of all Drawings, Specifications,
Bulletins, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, catalog
data, samples, manufacturer operating and maintenance
instructions, certificates, Warranties, Change Orders, and
other modifications, including As-Built Drawings.
1.6.2.3
The Contractor shall at all time permit access to the
Contract Documents to authorized representatives of the
Owner, and the Architect. and the .
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 6
4648000v1
1.6.3
As-Built Drawings
1.6.3.1
The Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all
approved changes made to the Drawings to show actual
installation where installation varies from Work as
originally shown, including the exact location and depth
of underground utility lines.
1.6.3.2
During the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall
record prior to any pay request submission any approved
changes on the Drawings, neatly in colored pencil, noting
new information not shown on the original Drawings and
bring this to the attention of the Architect. Failure to
provide the information may be cause for partial payment
withholding.
1.6.3.3
Where Shop Drawings are used, the Contractor shall cross
reference the corresponding sheet numbers on the
Drawings. The Contractor shall note related Change
Order numbers where applicable.
1.6.3.4
The Contractor shall keep a record of any change made to
the Specifications, noting particularly any variation from
manufacturer's
installation
instructions
and
recommendations.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 7
4648000v1
ARTICLE 2 - THE CONTRACTOR
2.1
CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
2.1.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for and have control over all
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures
for all portions of the Contractor's Work and shall be responsible for
any injury or damage which may result from improper construction,
installation, maintenance or operation to the fullest extent permitted
by law.
2.1.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for properly and accurately
laying out all lines, levels, elevations and measurements for all the
Work as required by the Contract Documents.
2.1.3
The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching required for
the Contractor's Work and shall not endanger the Project by cutting,
excavating or otherwise altering the Project, or any part of it.
2.1.4
2.1.3.1
The Contractor requiring sleeves shall furnish and
coordinate the Contractor's installation of the sleeves.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact location
and size of all holes and openings required to be formed
or built for the Work, and to permit coordination with any
Work performed by others on the Project.
2.1.3.2
The Contractor shall allow sufficient time for installation
of any Work by others before covering or closing the
applicable portion of the Project.
2.1.3.3
Patching shall match and blend with the existing or
adjacent surface. Any patching required because of faulty
or ill-timed Work shall be done by and at the expense of
the Contractor.
The Contractor shall not cut away any timber or dig under any
foundation or into any wall, or other part of the Project, without the
written approval of the Owner and the Architect.
2.1.4.1
The Contractor, prior to starting excavation or trenching,
shall notify any public authority having jurisdiction over
the Project and secure any required approval.
2.1.4.2
The Contractor shall backfill any excavation with the
material specified and approved by the Architect.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 8
4648000v1
2.2
2.1.5
The Contractor shall install all Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents and any installation recommendations of the
manufacturer, including required dryness for installation of the
various materials.
2.1.6
The Contractor shall comply with all requirements and conditions of
the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
general permit, including, but not limited to, implementing and
maintaining the control measures specified in the storm water
pollution prevention plan, maintaining records of construction
activities, removing materials no longer required and taking proper
action if there is a reportable quantity spill.
2.1.7
The Contractor shall keep a daily log containing a record of weather,
number of workers on site for the Contractor, identification of
equipment, Work accomplished, problems encountered and other
similar relevant data. A copy of this log shall be provided to the
Owner upon request.
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION
2.2.1
The Contractor shall provide continuous supervision at the Project by
a competent Project Manager/Superintendent when any Work is
being performed.
2.2.2
The Contractor's Project Manager/Superintendent shall have
responsibility and authority to act on behalf of the Contractor. All
communications to the Contractor's superintendent shall be as
binding as if given directly to the Contractor.
2.2.3
The Contractor shall submit an outline of the qualifications and
experience of the Contractor's proposed superintendent, including
references, to the Architect and the Owner, within ten (10) days of
the Notice to Proceed.
2.2.4
2.2.3.1
The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's
proposed Project Manager/Superintendent.
Failure to
notify the Contractor of such rejection within 30 days of
receipt of the required information shall constitute notice
of no objection.
2.2.3.2
If the Contractor's Project Manager/Superintendent is
rejected, the Contractor shall replace the Project
Manager/Superintendent at no additional cost.
The Contractor shall not change the Contractor's Project
Manager/Superintendent without written approval of the Owner.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 9
4648000v1
2.3
2.2.4.1
If the Contractor proposes to change the Contractor's
Project Manager/Superintendent, the Contractor shall
submit to the Architect and Owner, a written justification
for the change, along with the name and qualifications of
the individual whom the Contractor proposes to be the
new Project Manager/Superintendent.
2.2.4.2
The procedure provided in paragraph GC 2.2.3 shall be
conducted to evaluate the Contractor's proposed new
Project Manager/Superintendent.
PROTECTION OF THE PROJECT
2.3.1
The Contractor shall protect the Contractor's Work from weather,
and shall maintain the Work and all materials, apparatus, and fixtures
free from injury or damage during the entire construction period.
2.3.1.1
Work likely to be damaged shall be covered or protected
by the Contractor at all times to prevent damage.
2.3.1.2
Any Work damaged by failure of the Contractor to
provide coverage or protection shall be removed and
replaced with new Work at the Contractor's expense.
2.3.1.3
Any adjacent property, including without limitation roads,
walks, shrubbery, plants, trees or turf, damaged during the
Contractor's Work shall be properly repaired or replaced
at the Contractor's expense.
2.3.2
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall protect the Project and existing or adjacent property
from damage at all times and shall erect and maintain necessary
barriers, furnish and keep lighted necessary danger signals at night,
and take precaution to prevent injury or damage to persons or
property.
2.3.3
The Contractor shall not load, nor permit any part of the Project to be
loaded, in any manner that will endanger the Project, or any portion
thereof, nor shall the Contractor subject any part of the Project or
existing or adjacent property to stress or pressure that will endanger
the property.
2.3.4
The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracing, shoring and
other structural support required for safety of the Project and proper
execution of the Work.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 10
4648000v1
2.4
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
2.4.1
The Contractor's material and equipment shall be new and of the
quality specified in the Contract Documents.
2.4.2
Only the materials and equipment which are to be used directly in the
Work shall be brought to or stored at the Project by the Contractor
and the Contractor's Subcontractors and Material Suppliers.
2.4.2.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper storage
of all material and equipment brought to the Project.
2.4.2.2
All material and equipment brought or delivered on the
site shall be:
1) Coordinated with the proper sequence of the Work; and
2) Subject to the approval of the Contractor.
2.4.2.3
2.5
After the material or equipment is no longer required for
the Work, the Contractor shall remove such material and
equipment from the Project.
2.4.3
The Contractor's material and equipment shall not cause damage to
the Project or adjacent property and shall not endanger any person at,
or in the vicinity of, the Project.
2.4.4
Any injury to person or damage to property resulting from the
Contractor's material or equipment shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
LABOR
2.5.1
The Contractor shall maintain a sufficient workforce and enforce
good discipline and order among the Contractor's employees the
employees of the Contractor's Subcontractors and Material Suppliers.
The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or
persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.
2.5.2
The Contractor shall dismiss from the Project any person employed
by the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors and Material
Suppliers who is found to be incompetent, guilty of misconduct, or
detrimental to the construction of the Project.
2.5.3
The Contractor shall employ all legal efforts to minimize the
likelihood or effect of any strike, work stoppage or other labor
disturbance. Informational pickets shall not justify any work
stoppage.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 11
4648000v1
2.5.4
2.6
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2.6.1
The Contractor shall take precautions for the safety of persons on the
Project and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal,
State and municipal safety laws and buildings codes and the Project
Safety Program to prevent injury to persons on or adjacent to the
Project.
2.6.2
The Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the
Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
The Contractor shall be responsible for any fine or cost incurred as a
result of any violation or alleged violation.
2.6.3
Prior to starting the Work, the Contractor shall provide and inform
all its employees and Subcontractors of the methods and equipment
for protecting the Project and persons from fire damage, in
accordance with applicable fire regulations.
2.6.4
Methods and equipment for protecting persons and the Project shall
be subject to inspection and approval of the appropriate authority
having jurisdiction over the Project site.
2.6.5
Work Stoppage Due to Hazardous Materials
2.6.6
2.6.5.1
In the event the Contractor encounters materials
reasonably believed to be containing asbestos,
polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other hazardous waste
or material, which has not been rendered harmless, the
Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area
affected and report the condition to the Owner and the
Architect, in writing.
2.6.5.2
The Work in the affected area shall be resumed upon
written notice that the material has been removed or
rendered harmless.
2.6.5.3
The term "rendered harmless" shall mean that the level of
exposure is less than any applicable exposure standards
set forth in OSHA or other applicable regulations.
Hazardous Materials to be used at the Project Site shall be identified
by a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). The Contractor shall
assemble all of its applicable MSDS in a notebook and submit it to
the Architect prior to a Hazardous Material being brought to the
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 12
4648000v1
Project site. The l Contractor shall maintain all MSDS notebooks at
the Project site for the duration of the Project.
2.7
2.8
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
2.7.1
The Contractor shall provide all water necessary for the Contractor's
Work.
2.7.2
The Contractor shall erect and maintain adequate hoisting facilities
as required for the Contractor's Work in coordination with the Owner
and the Subcontractors.
2.7.2.1
If electric service requirements of hoisting facilities differ
from that available at the Project site, the Contractor shall
make and pay for all necessary connections.
2.7.2.2
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor requiring use of hoisting facilities, after the
Project is enclosed, shall be responsible for transporting
persons and materials as required for the Contractor's
Work.
2.7.3
The Contractor shall make all arrangements for temporary light and
power services and shall pay all charges, both for service installation
and removal. The Owner will pay the cost of energy consumption.
2.7.4
The Contractor shall provide, and maintain in a clean condition,
adequate and approved sanitary facilities for use by all persons at the
Project.
PERMITS
2.8.1
2.8.2
State/City of Bexley Permits
2.8.1.1
The Owner shall secure the required general building
permits.
2.8.1.2
The Contractor shall schedule the intermediate and final
inspections required for any permit certification. The
Contractor shall give the Architect, and the Owner
reasonable notice of the date arranged for any inspection.
Local Permits
2.8.2.1
The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for any
permit or license, fees or tap fees required by local
authorities having jurisdiction over the Project.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 13
4648000v1
2.9
TESTS
2.9.1
The Owner may, in his sole discretion, retain the services of an
independent testing and inspection agency to assist in evaluating if
the Work is in conformance with the Contract Documents.
Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor
from his responsibility to perform the Work including establishing
and implementing a quality control system.
2.9.2
The Contractor shall apply, secure and pay for any inspection, testing
or approval required by the Contract Documents, laws, ordinance,
rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction over the Project at appropriate times during the progress
of the Work.
2.9.3
2.9.2.1
The Contractor shall give the Architect, and the Owner
reasonable notice of the date arranged for such inspection,
testing or approval.
2.9.2.2
The Contractor shall provide an original report of the
inspection, testing or approval to the Architect, with a
copy to the Owner, for approval.
2.9.2.3
The Contractor shall provide all necessary and
appropriate labor, equipment, apparatus and materials as
may be required to properly support the inspection and
testing required pursuant to Paragraph 2.9.2.
If after the commencement of the Work, the Architect, and the
Owner determine that any portion of the Work requires special
inspection, testing or approval in order to insure proper conformance
to the Contract Documents, the Architect, and the Owner may
instruct the Contractor in writing to order such special inspecting,
testing or approval, or the Architect, the and the Owner may make
the arrangements for same.
2.9.3.1
If such special inspection, testing or approval reveals a
failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of
the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay all costs
associated with such special inspection, testing or
approval.
2.9.3.2
If such special inspection, testing or approval reveals that
the Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents,
the Contractor will be paid, by appropriate Change Order,
for all costs associated with such special inspection,
testing or approval.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 14
4648000v1
2.9.4
Neither the observations of the Architect or the Owner in the
administration of the contract, nor inspections, tests or approvals by
persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from
the Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in conformity with
the Contract Documents.
2.10 CLEANING UP
2.10.1 During the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the removal of all waste materials and rubbish attributable to the
Work to a dumpster by the Contractor. The Contractor shall perform
daily broom cleaning in the area of the Contractor's Work.
2.10.1.1
The Contractor shall, at the end of each working day or
more frequently if directed by the Architect or the Owner,
remove all waste materials and rubbish from the Project.
2.10.1.2
The Contractor shall, as required for the Project or as
directed by the Architect or the Owner, remove any waste
materials or rubbish from areas adjacent to the Project.
2.10.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up during the progress of the Work,
the provision of paragraph GC 5.2 shall be invoked.
2.10.3 If the Contractor fails to maintain the areas adjacent to the Project
clean and free of waste materials and rubbish, upon written
notification by the Architect or the Owner, the provisions of
Paragraph GC 5.2 may be invoked.
2.11 SUBSTITUTIONS
2.11.1 Substitutes for Standards or Approved Equals may be considered
after the bid opening if the Contractor can conclusively demonstrate
to the Architect one of the following conditions:
2.11.1.1
Unavailability of all Standards or Approved Equals
through no fault of the Contractor or the Contractor's
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers;
2.11.1.2
All Standards or Approved Equals are no longer
produced;
2.11.1.3
All Standards or Approved Equals will not perform as
designed.
2.12 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 15
4648000v1
2.12.1 Blasting will not be permitted and explosives may not be brought
onto or kept on the site of the Project, except with prior written
approval of the Owner.
2.12.2 All blasting, storing and handling of explosives shall be done as
prescribed in Ohio Revised Code Chapter 3743, , Explosives Law,
and other applicable state regulations.
2.12.3 The Contractor shall carry appropriate liability insurance and shall be
responsible for any damages to persons or property resulting from
any blasting operation.
2.13 EMERGENCY
2.13.1 In the event of an emergency affecting the safety of persons, the
Project or adjacent property, the Contractor, without special
instruction or authorization, shall act to prevent any threatened
damage, injury or loss.
2.13.2 The Contractor shall give the Owner and the Architect written notice
if the Contractor believes that any significant change in the Work or
variation from the Contract Documents has been caused by any
emergency or action taken in response to an emergency.
2.13.3 If the Architect recommends that a change in the Contract
Documents be made because of any emergency or action taken in
response to an emergency, and the Owner approves, a Change Order
will be issued.
2.14 UNCOVERING THE WORK
2.14.1 If any Work is covered contrary to the requirements of the Contract
Documents or to the written request of the Architect or the Owner,
such Work must, if required by the Architect or the Owner in
writing, be uncovered for observation and replaced, if not in
conformity with the Contract Documents, and recovered at the
Contractor's expense.
2.14.2 If any Work has been covered in accordance with the Contract
Documents and is Work which the Architect or the Owner had not
requested the opportunity to observe prior to covering, the Architect
or the Owner may request that such Work be uncovered by the
Contractor.
2.14.2.1
If such Work is found not to be in conformity with the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay all costs of
uncovering, replacing and recovering the Work.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 16
4648000v1
2.14.2.2
If such Work is found to be in conformity with the
Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacing
and recovering the Work shall, by appropriate Change
Order, be paid to the Contractor.
2.15 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
2.15.1 The Architect, with a copy to the Owner, shall notify the Contractor
in writing if any Work is found by the Architect to be Defective,
whether observed before or after Contract Completion. The
Architect or the Owner shall specify in the written notice the time
within which the Contractor shall correct the Defective Work.
2.15.2 The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such Defective
Work, including the cost of any consequential damages.
2.15.3 If the Contractor fails to correct any Defective Work within the time
fixed in the written notice, the Owner may correct such Work and
seek recovery of all costs, including any consequential damages,
from the Contractor or the Contractor's Surety.
2.15.4 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so
instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the
Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable.
2.16 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES
2.16.1 Whenever it becomes necessary to interrupt existing services in use
by the Owner, such as sewer, water, gas and steam lines, electric or
telephone and cable service, the Contractor shall continue the Work
on a 24 hour basis until the Work is completed and the service
restored, or at such alternate time required by the Owner.
2.16.2 Before beginning such Work, the Contractor shall, through the
Owner, apply in writing to and receive approval in writing from the
Owner and the authority with appropriate jurisdiction over the
Project, to establish a time when interruption of the service will
cause a minimum of interference with the activities of the Owner.
2.16.3 The Contractor shall include in his bid amount all costs associated
with performing such Work on an afterhours basis.
ARTICLE 3 - THE ARCHITECT
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 17
4648000v1
3.1
PROJECT OVERSIGHT
3.1.1
3.2
The Architect shall notify, advise and consult with the Owner and
shall protect the Owner against Defective Work throughout the
completion of the Project.
3.1.1.1
The Architect shall designate an authorized
representative, who shall be approved by the Owner, to
visit the Project, as required by Agreement, to observe
and check the progress and quality of the Work and to
take such action as is necessary or appropriate to achieve
conformity with the Contract Documents.
3.1.1.2
It shall be the duty of the Architect to have any consultant
visit the Project at such intervals required by Agreement
or as may be deemed necessary by the Owner to review
the Work in order to achieve the results intended by the
Contract Documents.
3.1.2
The Architect, and Owner, each, jointly and severably, shall have
the authority to disapprove or reject any item of Work which is
Defective, or that the Architect believes will not produce a Project
that conforms to the Contract Documents, or that will prejudice the
integrity of the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole
as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Architect shall
immediately notify the Owner at any time that Work has been
disapproved or rejected.
3.1.3
The Architect shall not be responsible for construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences, procedures, safety precautions and
programs in connection with the Work, or for the Contractor's failure
to carry out the Work in conformity with the Contract Documents.
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
3.2.1
The Architect shall provide administration of the construction
contracts for the Project as provided in the Agreement and including
the performance of the functions hereinafter described.
3.2.1.1
The Architect shall assist the Owner to prepare an agenda
and shall attend any and all progress meetings.
3.2.1.2
The Architect may authorize minor changes or alterations
in the Work not involving additional costs and not
inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract
Documents.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 18
4648000v1
3.2.1.3
The Architect shall review and approve, or recommend
approval, of all forms required under the Contract
Documents.
3.2.1.4
The Architect shall render decisions in connection with
the Contractor's responsibilities under the Contract
Documents, and submit recommendations to the Owner
for enforcement of the Contract as necessary.
3.2.2
The Architect will be the initial interpreter of all requirements of the
Contract Documents, pursuant to paragraph GC 1.5.2. All decisions
of the Architect shall be subject to final determination by the Owner.
3.2.3
The Architect shall be authorized to require special inspection,
testing or approval of the Work, as provided in paragraph GC 2.9,
whenever in the Architect's reasonable opinion such action is
necessary or advisable to insure the proper conformance to the
Contract Documents.
3.2.4
Based upon the Architect's on-site observation and evaluation of the
Contractor's Application for Payment, the Architect shall review and
certify the amounts due the Contractor. The Architect may
recommend to the Owner that payments be withheld from, or
Liquidated Damages be assessed against, the
Contractor’s
applications for payment, stating the reasons for such
recommendation. The Architect's certification for payment shall
constitute a representation that the Work has progressed to the point
indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge,
information and belief, the Work is in conformity with the Contract
Documents and the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount
certified.
3.2.5
The Architect shall review and approve or take other appropriate
action upon the Contractor's submittals, within the required time, for
the purpose of checking for conformity with the Contract
Documents.
3.2.6
The Architect shall prepare all Bulletins and Change Orders,
including a cost estimate and supportive documentation and data.
3.2.7
The Architect, with the assistance of the Owner, shall conduct
inspections to determine the date of Contract Completion and shall
receive, review and forward to the appropriate entity all Project
record submittals required by the Contract Documents.
3.2.8
The Architect shall render written decisions, within the time
specified, on all claims, disputes or other matters in question between
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 19
4648000v1
the Contractor and the Owner and shall provide information or
services to the Owner until final disposition of all claims.
ARTICLE 4 - CONSTRUCTION PHASE COORDINATION
4.1
RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR
4.1.1
The Contractor shall afford other Contractors and such Contractor's
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers reasonable opportunity for the
introduction and storage of materials and execution of Work and
shall properly connect and coordinate the Contractor's Work with the
Work of others on the Project. The Contractor shall complete
portions of the Work in such order and time as provided in the
Construction Schedule.
4.1.2
The Contractor shall perform the Work so as not to interfere, disturb,
hinder or delay the Work of Subcontractors or other Contractors.
The sole remedy which may be provided by the Owner for any
injury, damage or expense resulting from interference, hindrance,
disruption or delay caused by or between Subcontractors or other
Contractors or their agents and employees shall be an extension of
time in which to complete the Work.
4.1.2.1
Should the Contractor, or the Contractor's Subcontractors
or Material Suppliers, cause damage or injury to the
property or Work, or by failure to perform the Work with
due diligence, delay, interfere, hinder or disrupt any
Contractor who suffers additional expense or damage
thereby, the Contractor shall be responsible for such
damage, injury or expense.
4.1.2.2
4.1.2.3
4.1.3
Claims, disputes or actions concerning such damage,
injury or expense shall not delay completion of the Work
which shall be continued by the parties to any such
dispute, action or claim.
If any part of the Contractor's Work is preceded by the Work of
another Contractor, the Contractor shall inspect such other
Contractor's Work before commencing any Work, and report in
writing to the Architect, with a copy to the Owner, any defects which
render the other Contractor's preceding Work unsuitable as related to
the Contractor's Work.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 20
4648000v1
4.1.3.1
Failure of the Contractor to make such inspection and
report in writing, as required by paragraph GC 4.1.3, shall
constitute an acceptance of the other Contractor's Work as
fit and proper for the reception of the Contractor's Work,
except as to latent defects which such inspection fails to
disclose.
4.1.4
The Contractor shall supervise the Work and shall take orders and
directions from the Owner and
the Architect, to the extent
appropriate.
4.1.5
The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the Architect, with a
copy to the Owner, when the Architect's presence is required for
special consultations, inspections or decisions.
4.1.6
If the Contractor fails to perform the Contract according to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, such failure to perform may
be just cause for the Owner to find the Contractor is not qualified for
consideration of future contract award.
4.1.7
The Contractor shall cooperate with the Architect, and the Owner so as
not to interfere, disturb, hinder or delay the Work.
4.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF THE CONTRACTOR
4.2.1
The Contractor shall consult with the Owner and Architect to obtain
full knowledge of all rules, regulations or requirements affecting the
Project. The Contractor shall establish the regular working hours,
subject to approval by the Owner.
4.2.2
The Contractor shall schedule the Project and coordinate the Work of
all Subcontractors with each other and with the activities and
responsibilities of the Owner and the Architect to complete the
Project in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.2.3
The Contractor shall develop the Construction Schedule for the
Project in accordance with paragraph GC 4.3 and shall prepare and
keep current, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the
Construction Schedule.
4.2.3.1
The Construction Schedule shall not exceed the time limit
specified in the Notice to Proceed, shall provide for
reasonable, efficient and economical execution of the
Work and shall be related to the entire Project to the
extent required by the Contract Documents.
4.2.3.2
The Construction Schedule shall be used to plan, organize
and execute the Work, record and report actual
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 21
4648000v1
performance and progress and show how the Contractor
plans to coordinate all remaining Work by Contract
Completion.
4.2.4
The Contractor shall monitor the progress of the Work for
conformance with the Construction Schedule and shall initiate
revisions of the Construction Schedule as required by the Contract
Documents.
4.2.5
The
Architect shall review and recommend approval of the
Contractor’s Application for Payment and may recommend to the
Owner that payments be withheld from, or Liquidated Damages be
assessed against, a Contractor's Application for Payment, stating the
reasons for such recommendation.
4.2.6
The Contractor shall attend and conduct any and all progress
meetings. The Contractor shall prepare an agenda and a written
report of each progress meeting and distribute the report to the
Architect, and the Owner. The Contractor shall not delegate the duty
to prepare the agenda and written reports of any progress meeting.
4.2.7
In the event of default by any subcontractor, the Contractor shall
cooperate with the Architect, and the Owner and the defaulting
subcontractor's Surety to Contract Completion.
4.2.8
The Contractor shall keep a daily log containing a record of weather,
number of workers on site for each Contractor, identification of
equipment, Work accomplished, problems encountered and other
similar relevant data.
4.2.9
The Architect shall render written decisions, within the time
specified, on all claims, disputes or other matters in question between
the Contractor and the Owner and shall provide information or
services to the Owner until final disposition of all claims.
4.2.10 The Architect and Owner shall not be responsible for construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures, safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The services
provided by the Owner, the existence of schedules or services
prepared or performed by the Owner shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for complying with all the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
4.3
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
4.3.1
The Contractor shall prepare the Construction Schedule for the
Project using critical path scheduling methods.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 22
4648000v1
4.3.1.1
4.3.2
The Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of a revised
Construction Schedule within five (5) days after receipt of
a Notice To Proceed with a copy to the Owner.
The Contractor shall prepare a Construction Schedule which shall
include, without limitation, the following information.
4.3.2.1
Provide a graphic presentation of the sequence of the
Work for the Project in the media and format required by
the project;
4.3.2.2
Provide identification of each phase of the Work
including any milestone dates required by the
Construction Documents;
4.3.2.3
Provide activities and durations identified for all shop
drawing review and approval, product review and
procurement, fabrication, shop inspection and delivery,
including lead time, coordination drawing delivery, Punch
List, Project close-out requirements, Contract Completion
and occupancy requirements;
4.3.2.4
Identify disruptions and shutdowns due to other
operations;
4.3.2.5
Identify the critical path of the Work, for CPM Schedules;
4.3.2.6
Provide a space for each Team Member’s signature.
4.3.2.7
The Contractor shall develop the Construction Schedule
using commercially available computer software
approved by the Owner and Architect. Final copy
schedules shall be provided in color in full size and 11” x
17” size. All base line and monthly updated schedules
shall be submitted in electronic format that includes the
root file to the Architect, Contractor, and the Owner.
The CPM Schedule Chart shall be used as a tool for
scheduling and reporting sequenced progress of the work.
Provide clear graphics legend and other data such as
milestones, constraints and items required by the project.
On each submission show the project name and provide a
signature approval and date line for all parties to the
schedule.
Further, provide in each schedule: Activity identification
and description for each activity broken down to a 15 day
maximum
duration,
responsibility
of
each
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 23
4648000v1
Contractor/Subcontractor,
Contractor/Subcontractor’s
resources and crew size for each activity, provide early
start, early finish, late start, late finish. Show predecessor
activities and successor activities for each activity entry
free float, total float and percentage of completion and
identify the logic relationship between all activities.
Also, show all submittal dates, coordination drawing
input, review and approval durations.
Unless otherwise specified, submit the CPM Construction
Schedule in graphic and tabular form. Provide a two
week look-ahead schedule print out for each weekly
progress meeting. Provide with each monthly schedule
update a list of all changes to the previously approved
base line schedule or monthly updated schedule.
The CPM Construction Schedule shall be managed using
early start and early finish dates. Free float and total float
belong to the Project, not to the Contractors, and the use
of float shall be administered by the Owner and
Architect.
4.3.3
No payment will be made without a Construction Schedule
approved by the Contractor, the Architect and the Owner.
4.3.3.1
4.3.4
Unless otherwise specified by the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall, on a weekly basis, prepare and submit a written
report describing activities begun or finished during the preceding
week, Work in progress, expected completion of the Work, a lookahead projection of all activities to be started or finished in the
upcoming two (2) weeks, including without limitation, the
Contractor’s workforce crew size and total resource hours associated
with such Work and any other information requested by the Owner
and/or Architect.
4.3.5
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall provide monthly progress reports to the Architect,
and the Owner which shall include recommendations for adjusting
the Construction Schedule to meet milestone completion and
Contract Completion dates.
4.3.5.1
When it is apparent to the Contractor, the Owner or the
Architect that critical path activities, scheduled milestone
completion dates, or Contract Completion dates will not
be met, the Contractor shall submit for review and
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 24
4648000v1
approval, a time recovery plan. The Contractor shall
submit to the Architect and Owner, for review and
approval, a time recovery plan to avoid any delay.
4.3.5.2
4.3.6
4.4
Such a plan may include, without limitation, increasing
the Contractor's workforce in such quantities as will
eliminate the backlog of Work; increasing the number of
working hours per shift, shifts per workday, workdays per
week, the amount of construction equipment, or any
combination thereof; rescheduling of activities to achieve
maximum practical concurrency of Work efforts.
The Contractor shall update the Construction Schedule on a monthly
basis at a minimum.
4.3.6.1
The updated Construction Schedule shall be signed by the
Contractor which shall serve as an affirmation that the
Contractor can meet the requirements of the updated
Construction Schedule.
4.3.6.2
Submit a tabular copy showing all changes to the
previously approved schedule including without
limitation, logic, float and actual start date of activities.
The updated Construction Schedule shall be submitted to
the Owner and the Architect who shall review and
approve it
4.3.6.3
No payment will be made without an approved updated
Construction Schedule.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
4.4.1
The Contractor and the Architect shall schedule a weekly progress
meeting for all Contractors and other parties involved in the Project.
The purpose of the progress meeting is to review progress in the
Work during the previous week, discuss anticipated progress during
the following weeks, and review critical operations and existing and
potential problems.
4.4.2
The Contractor and the Architect shall be represented at every
progress meeting by a person authorized to make decisions.
4.4.2.1
The Contractor shall notify the Project Team of the time
and place of the progress meeting which shall thereafter
be the same day and hour of the week for the duration of
the Project.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 25
4648000v1
4.4.2.2
4.4.3
4.5
The Contractor shall have any of the Contractor's
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers attend the progress
meeting as deemed advisable by the Contractor or as
requested by the Architect.
The Contractor shall prepare a written report of each progress
meeting and distribute such report to the Architect, and the Owner.
The Contractor shall not delegate the duty to prepare a written report
of each progress meeting.
4.4.3.1
If any person in attendance objects to anything in a report
of a progress meeting, the person shall notify the
Contractor in writing explaining the objection and shall
provide a copy of the notice to other persons as required
by paragraph GC 1.3.
4.4.3.2
The report of each progress meeting shall reflect any
objection made to the report of the previous progress
meeting and any response.
COORDINATION MEETINGS
4.5.1
The Contractor shall schedule a weekly coordination meeting for all
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers.
4.5.1.1
4.5.2
The purpose of the coordination meeting is to establish
the exact location of each piece of equipment, pipe, duct,
conduit, or other component of the Project; to discuss the
sequence of construction consistent with the Construction
Schedule, and to appropriately share available
construction and storage space.
The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare one-fourth inch equals one
foot scale drawings of all sheet metal work with plan and elevation
dimensions to specifically locate all duct work, equipment and
HVAC pipe work, either on the same or separate drawings.
4.5.2.1
The HVAC Subcontractor will provide the drawings to
the Contractor for use in preparing drawings of the
Contractor's Work, to specifically locate equipment,
piping, conduit and other Work.
4.5.2.2
The Contractor shall resubmit the drawings to the HVAC
Subcontractor showing the location of the Contractor's
equipment, piping, conduit, and other Work for
preparation of detailed coordination drawings by the
HVAC Subcontractor.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 26
4648000v1
4.5.3
The Contractor shall be represented at every coordination meeting by
a person authorized to make decisions. The Contractor shall have
any of the Contractor's Subcontractors and Material Suppliers attend
the coordination meeting as deemed advisable by the Contractor or
as requested.
4.5.4
Failure of the Contractor to attend the Progress Meetings or
Coordination Meetings shall not be the basis for a claim by the
Contractor.
ARTICLE 5 - OWNER’S RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1 OWNER
5.1.1
The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act on the
behalf of the Owner with respect to decisions required by the Owner
during the Project.
5.1.2
Information and services required of the Owner shall be furnished in
good faith and in a timely manner to avoid delay in the progress of the
Project.
5.1.3
The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work whenever the
Project is in preparation or progress.
5.1.4
Upon the issuance of the Notice to Proceed or at a reasonable time
thereafter, the Owner shall provide the Contractor access to the Project
site in such condition to permit the Contractor to perform the Work.
5.1.5
The Owner may request any change in the Work.
5.2 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PROSECUTE WORK AND BACKCHARGE
CONTRACTOR
5.2.1
If the Contractor provides defective work or fails or neglects to
prosecute the Work with the necessary diligence so as to complete
the Work within the time specified in the Contract Documents or any
portion of the Work by the applicable milestone date as set forth in
the Construction Schedule, the Architect shall notify the Contractor
in writing of such failure or neglect.
5.2.2
If the Contractor fails or refuses to cure such failure or neglect within
three (3) working days after receipt of the written notice (72 hour
Notice), the Architect shall recommend enforcement of the Contract
to the Owner. Without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner
may have, the Owner may employ upon the Work the additional
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 27
4648000v1
force, or supply the materials or such part of either as is appropriate,
to correct the deficiency in the Contractor's Work.
5.3
5.2.2.1
In such case, a Change Order shall be issued deducting
from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the
costs of correcting such deficiency.
5.2.2.2
If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are
not sufficient to cover such costs, the Contractor and the
Contractor's Surety shall pay the amount of the
insufficiency to the Owner.
5.2.2.3
The decision of the Owner to back charge the Contractor
shall be final.
OWNER'S RIGHT TO PARTIAL OCCUPANCY
5.3.1
If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion of the
Project prior to Contract Completion, such occupancy or use may be
accomplished if the area in question has been approved for
temporary occupancy by the Division of Industrial Compliance of the
State Department of Commerce.
5.3.2
If such Partial Occupancy or use occurs, the Architect, may process
either a Change Order or a Contract Completion certificate listing the
deficient Work under the Contract for approval by the Owner,
provided that no such occupancy or use shall commence before any
insurers providing property insurance have acknowledged notice
thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated
thereby.
5.3.3
From the date of execution of the Change Order or Contract
Completion certificate by the Owner, the Contractor shall be relieved
of obligation to maintain the accepted portion of the Work, but shall
remain obligated to correct any Punch List items then uncorrected.
The Contractor shall continue to carry the appropriate insurance
during performance of any Punch List Work.
5.3.4
Partial Occupancy or use of the premises by the Owner shall not
constitute acceptance of any Work not in conformity with the
Contract Documents. Partial occupancy shall not relieve the
Contractor of liability for any express or implied warranties or
responsibility for Defective Work.
ARTICLE 6 - TIME
6.1
TIME IS OF ESSENCE
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 28
4648000v1
6.1.1
6.2
Time is of the essence to the Contract Documents and all obligations
thereunder. By executing the Contract, the Contractor acknowledges
that the time for Contract Completion and any specified milestone
completion dates are reasonable, taking into consideration the
average climatic range and usual conditions prevailing in the locality
of the Project.
6.1.1.1
The Contractor agrees that the Notice to Proceed shall
establish the date for commencement of the Work.
6.1.1.2
The Contractor agrees that the Owner has entered into, or
may enter into, agreements for use of all or part of the
premises where the Work is to be completed based upon
the Contractor achieving milestone dates established in
the Contract Schedule.
6.1.1.3
The Contractor agrees that the Work will be prosecuted in
a reasonable, efficient and economical sequence, in
cooperation with the other Contractors and in the order
and time as provided in the Construction Schedule.
6.1.1.4
The Contractor shall recognize that his Work is a portion
of the total Work required to provide the Owner with a
complete Project. As such, the Contractor acknowledges
that his Work must be coordinated with the Work of
numerous other Contractors and agrees to cooperate in
such coordination. Additionally, the Contractor
acknowledges that the flow of his Work will be
interrupted by other Contractors in the performance of
their Work and that the Contractor may be required to
perform some portions of his Work out of sequence. The
Contractor shall account for such interference, disruption,
hindrance, delay and out of sequence work in the
estimating and scheduling of his Work. The Contractor
shall not be granted additional compensation for either
time or funds due to such interference, disruption,
hindrance, delay or out of sequence work.
EXTENSIONS
6.2.1
If the Contractor is interfered with, disrupted, hindered or delayed at
any time in the progress of the Work by any of the following causes,
the Contract time shall be extended for such reasonable time which
the Architect determines, in consultation with the Owner, has been
caused by the interference, disruption, hindrance or delay in the
Work:
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 29
4648000v1
6.3
6.4
6.2.1.1
Delay due to suspension of the Work for which the
Contractor is not responsible; inclement weather
conditions not normally prevailing in the particular
season; labor dispute; fire; flood;
6.2.1.2
Neglect, delay or fault of any Contractor having a
Contract for adjoining or contiguous Work; or
6.2.1.3
By any unforeseeable cause beyond the control and
without fault or negligence of the Contractor.
SOLE REMEDY
6.3.1
To the fullest extent permitted by law, any extension of time granted
shall be the sole remedy which may be provided by the Owner and
the Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or
mitigation of Liquidated Damages for any delay, including, without
limitation, costs of acceleration, consequential damages, loss of
efficiency, loss of productivity, lost opportunity costs, impact
damages, lost profits or other similar remuneration.
6.3.2
The Contractor agrees that the possibility that the Contractor may
accelerate its performance to meet the Construction Schedule is
within the contemplation of the parties and that such acceleration is
solely within the discretion of the Contractor.
REQUEST FOR EXTENSION
6.4.1
Any request by the Contractor for an extension of time shall be made
by written notice to the Architect and Owner no more than ten (10)
days after the initial occurrence of any condition which, in the
Contractor's opinion, entitles the Contractor to an extension of time.
Failure to provide such timely notice to the Architect and Owner
shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor of any claim for
extension, damages or mitigation of Liquidated Damages, to the
fullest extent permitted by law.
6.4.2
Contractor’s request shall provide the following information to
promote a timely response.
6.4.2.1
Nature of the interference, disruption, hindrance or delay;
6.4.2.2
Identification of Persons and events responsible for the
interference, disruption, hindrance or delay;
6.4.2.3
Date (or anticipated date) of commencement of the
interference, disruption, hindrance or delay;
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 30
4648000v1
6.5
6.4.2.4
Activities on the Construction Schedule which may be
affected by the interference, disruption, hindrance or delay,
or new activities created by the interference, disruption,
hindrance or delay and the relationship with existing
activities;
6.4.2.5
Anticipated duration of the interference, disruption,
hindrance or delay and of any remobilization period;
6.4.2.6
Specific number of days of extension requested and
specific
number of days for remobilization requested;
6.4.2.7
Recommended action to avoid or minimize any future
interference, disruption, hindrance or delay.
EVALUATION OF REQUEST
6.5.1
Within ten (10) days of receipt of the Contractor's request, the
Architect shall evaluate the facts and extent of any interference,
disruption, hindrance or delay to the Work, consult with the Owner
about the request and respond in writing to the Contractor. If the
Contractor fails to timely provide the information required by
Paragraph GC 6.4, the Owner shall have discretion to reject the
request for time extension. If a request for time extension is so
rejected, the Contractor shall be deemed to have waived any claim
for extension, damages or mitigation of Liquidated Damages to the
fullest extent permitted by law.
6.5.1.1
The time for Contract Completion may only be extended by
execution of an appropriate Change Order.
6.5.1.2
The Contractor shall make any necessary change in the
Construction Schedule if an extension is granted.
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1
CHANGE ORDER
7.1.1
The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in
the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of
additions, deletions or other revisions. To the extent the Contract
time or Contract price are affected, the Contract will be equitably
adjusted by Change Order in accordance with this Article and the
Change Order Procedure and Pricing Guidelines (CO).
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 31
4648000v1
7.1.2
7.1.1.1
The Contractor shall proportionately increase the amount
of the Bond whenever the Contract price is increased.
7.1.1.2
If notice of any change affecting the Contract is required
by the provision of any Bond, the giving of any such
notice shall be the Contractor's responsibility, and the
amount of each applicable Bond shall be adjusted
accordingly.
The Contractor shall not proceed with any change in the Work
without the required written authorization. If the Contractor believes
that any item is not Work required by the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall obtain a Change Order before proceeding with such
item. Except as provided in GC Article 8, failure to obtain such a
Change Order shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor of any
claim for additional compensation for such item.
7.1.2.1
7.1.3
7.2
The Contractor understands and agrees that acceptance of
a change order is final and that any dispute regarding the
terms and conditions of a change order or any desire to
reserve rights under a change order shall be resolved
through Article 8 of the General Conditions. If the
Contractor chooses to exercise rights under Article 8, the
Contractor is aware and understands that the Owner may
order the Contractor to perform the disputed work
pending, and prior to, the resolution of any Article 8
process.
The Owner reserves the right to cancel or modify any Change Order
authorization.
PRICE DETERMINATION
7.2.1
7.2.2
The cost or credit resulting from a change in the Work shall be
determined in accordance with the Change Order Procedure and
Pricing Guidelines.
7.2.1.1
Lump sum Proposals will not be considered or accepted
under any circumstances.
7.2.1.2
A Unit Price Proposal shall only be valid when
incorporated into the Contract by Change Order.
The Contractor shall not assign any portion of the Work to another
wherein the Contractor would benefit directly or indirectly from the
double application of charges for overhead or profit.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 32
4648000v1
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.3
In the event that no agreement can be reached as to the cost or credit
resulting from a change in the Work, said cost or credit shall be
determined by the Owner, upon the recommendation of the
Architect.
7.2.3.1
The Contractor shall proceed with the Change Order
Work when so directed by the Owner.
7.2.3.2
The Contractor may dispute the Owner’s determination
by filing a claim in accordance with GC Article 8.
The Owner reserves the right to require notarized invoices for
material costs and reserves the right to audit the records of the
Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors and Material
Suppliers.
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS
7.3.1
Should the Contractor encounter, during the progress of the Work,
concealed physical conditions at the Project, differing materially
from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as
inherent in the Work of the character provided for in the contract, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect, and the Owner, in
writing of such conditions, before they are disturbed.
7.3.2
The Architect, Contractor, and the Owner will promptly investigate
the conditions and if the Architect, Contractor, or the Owner finds
that such conditions do differ materially from those ordinarily
encountered and generally recognized as inherent in Work of the
character provided for in the Contract, causing an increase or
decrease in the cost of the Contract, an appropriate Change Order
shall be processed.
7.3.2.1
The Contractor will only proceed with a proper
authorization, in writing, as provided by the Contract
Documents.
7.3.2.2
No claim of the Contractor under paragraph GC 7.3.3
shall be allowed unless the Contractor provided the notice
required in paragraph GC 7.3.1.
7.4 TIME EXTENSION
7.4.1
Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents, time
extensions for changes in the Work will depend upon the extent to
which the change causes delay in Work.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 33
4648000v1
7.4.2
If the circumstances are that extending the Contract Completion date is
not possible, the Contractor shall price all costs of accelerated
performance in the Contractor's Proposal.
ARTICLE 8 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION PROCEDURE
8.1
FILING OF CLAIM
8.1.1 Whenever the Contractor intends to seek additional compensation or
mitigation of Liquidated Damages, whether due to delay, extra Work,
additional Work, breach of Contract, or other causes arising out of or
related to the Contract or the Project, the Contractor shall follow the
procedures set forth in this Article. To the fullest extent permitted by
law, failure of the Contractor to timely provide such notice shall
constitute a waiver by the Contractor of any claim for additional
compensation or for mitigation of Liquidated Damages.
8.1.2
8.2
8.1.2.1
Amount of the claim, which the Contractor shall certify
before a Notary Public is a fair and accurate assessment
of the damages suffered by the Contractor or the date of
commencement and nature of the interference, disruption,
hindrance or delay;
8.1.2.2
Identification of persons, entities and events responsible
for the claim;
8.1.2.3
Activities on the Construction Schedule affected by the
claim or new activities created by any event and the
relationship with existing activities;
8.1.2.4
Anticipated duration of any interference, disruption,
hindrance or delay; and
8.1.2.5
Recommended action to avoid or minimize any future
interference, disruption, hindrance or delay.
INITIAL RESPONSE
8.2.1
8.3
In every such written claim submitted in accordance with paragraph
GC 8.1, the Contractor shall provide the following information.
The Architect, shall within 30 days of receipt of a claim filed
pursuant to paragraph GC 8.1, render a decision on the claim unless a
mutual agreement is made to extend such time limit.
FIELD LEVEL REVIEW
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 34
4648000v1
8.4
8.3.1
The Contractor may appeal the decision of the Architect by
providing written notice to the Owner, within 30 days of the date of
the Architect’s decision.
8.3.2
The Owner shall, within 30 days of receipt of the notice, schedule a
meeting in an effort to resolve the claim, unless a mutual agreement
is made to extend such time limit. The meeting scheduled by the
Owner shall be attended by persons expressly and fully authorized to
resolve the dispute on behalf of the parties.
ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION
8.4.1
8.5
If, upon consideration of a claim, the parties mutually agree, the
claim may be referred to a form of Alternative Dispute Resolution,
including a procedure to equitably share the costs of the Alternative
Dispute Resolution.
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT
8.5.1
The Contractor shall proceed with performance of the Work during
any dispute resolution process, unless otherwise agreed by the
Contractor and the Owner in writing.
8.5.2
The Owner shall continue to make payment in accordance with the
Contract Documents pending final resolution of a claim.
ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACTOR PAYMENT
9.1
CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN
9.1.1
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, with a copy to the
Owner, a full, accurate and detailed estimate (the "Contract Cost
Breakdown") of the various kinds of labor to be performed and
material to be furnished, with separate amounts shown for labor and
materials for each branch of Work, following the preferred titles and
sequences of Sections of Construction Specifications Institute (CSI)
format used by the Architect in developing the Specifications
prepared in such form as the Owner and Architect may require.
9.1.1.1
9.1.2
The grand total shown on the Contract Cost Breakdown must equal
the total Contract price. The Owner reserves the right to use the
approved Contract Cost Breakdown to determine the cost or credit to
the Owner resulting from any change in the Work.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 35
4648000v1
9.1.2.1
9.1.2.2
9.2
The first item should be actual cost of Bond, insurance,
permits and tests required for the Project.
The amounts for labor and material shall accurately
reflect the cost for each item. Separate items shall not be
shown for overhead or profit, but shall be included in the
totals for labor and materials.
9.1.2.3
Whenever the material allocation exceeds 55 percent of
the Contract price, the Contractor shall provide, upon
request, sufficient information to support such higher
percentage.
9.1.2.4
Subcontract Work shall show amounts for labor and
materials. Fringe benefits shall be shown as a part of
labor costs.
9.1.2.5
The Contract Cost Breakdown shall be subdivided as
requested by the Owner, Owner or the Architect, with
cost details for each structure shown separately.
9.1.2.6
The Contract Cost Breakdown shall include separate line
items for all major pieces of mechanical and electrical
equipment, and group smaller equipment items by type.
9.1.3
The Contract Cost Breakdown will be returned to the Contractor for
resubmittal if it does not meet the requirements or contains
insufficient items or details of the Work.
9.1.4
No payment will be made without an approved Contract Cost
Breakdown.
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
9.2.1
The Contractor shall submit monthly to the Architect, with a copy to
the Owner, an itemized Application for Payment for Work performed
based upon the Contract Cost Breakdown.
9.2.1.1
The Application for Payment shall be supported by data
substantiating the Contractor's right to payment. The
Contractor shall supply such additional documentation as
the Owner or the Architect may request in connection
with each payment to the Contractor.
9.2.1.2
Certified payroll reports for the period of time indicated
shall be attached to one (1) copy of every Application for
Payment, see also paragraph GC 18.2.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 36
4648000v1
9.2.1.3
9.2.2
9.2.3
Payment of an approved Application for Payment shall be made
within 30 days from the date of approval by the Architect.
9.2.2.1
The Owner reserves the right to require proof of the
renewal of required insurance as a condition precedent to
payment.
9.2.2.2
Payments due and not paid to the Contractor within such
30 day period shall bear interest from the date payment is
due under the Contract Documents at the average of the
prime rate established at the commercial banks in the city
of Columbus, Ohio.
The amount of Liquidated Damages to which the Owner is entitled
under the Contract Documents may be deducted from any
Application for Payment.
9.2.3.1
9.3
9.4
The Contractor shall list on the Application for Payment
any approved Change Orders processed and performed
during the time covered by the Application for Payment.
Intermediate milestone completion dates are subject to
liquidated damages when identified in the Contract
Documents.
LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENTS
9.3.1
Partial payments to the Contractor for labor performed and material
delivered on the site shall be made at the rate of 90 percent of the
amount invoiced through the Application for Payment.
9.3.2
After the contract is 50 percent complete, as evidenced by payments
in the amount of at least 50 percent of the Contract price to the
Contractor, no additional funds shall be retained from payments for
labor so long as the progress of the Work remains satisfactory to the
Owner.
9.3.3
When payment is allowed on account of material delivered on the
site of the Project but not yet incorporated therein, such material
shall become the property of the Owner, but if such material is
stolen, destroyed, or damaged by casualty before being used, the
Contractor will be required to replace it at the Contractor's expense.
RETAINAGE
9.4.1
When the major portion of the Project is occupied or in use, and
there exists no other reason to withhold retainage, the retained
percentages held in connection with such portion shall, upon request
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 37
4648000v1
of the Contractor, be paid to the Contractor, withholding only that
amount necessary to assure completion, in the discretion of the
Owner.
9.4.2
9.5
9.4.1.1
Any reduction or release of retainage, or portion thereof,
shall not be a waiver of the Owner’s right to retainage in
connection with other payments to the Contractor, or any
other right or remedy the Owner has under the Contract
Documents at law or in equity.
9.4.1.2
Funds not previously paid shall be released to the
Contractor within 30 days of approval of a final pay
request by the Owner and execution of the certificate of
Contract Completion by the Owner.
Upon consent by the Contractor's Surety, the Owner may, reduce the
amount of funds retained for the faithful performance of Work by 50
percent of the amount of funds required to be retained, provided the
Contractor's Surety remains responsible for all damages that may be
caused due to default by the Contractor, including without limitation,
the following:
9.4.2.1
Completion of the Work;
9.4.2.2
All interference, disruption, hindrance and delay claims;
9.4.2.3
All liquidated damages; and
9.4.2.4
All additional expenses incurred by the Owner.
PAYMENTS WITHHELD
9.5.1
The Architect shall have the authority to recommend to the Owner
that payments be withheld from, or Liquidated Damages be assessed
against, a Contractor's Application for Payment, stating the reasons
for such recommendation.
9.5.2
The Owner reserves the right to decline to approve any Application
for Payment or part thereof, or because of subsequent evidence or
inspection, may nullify any previous Application for Payment, in
whole or in part, to such extent as may be necessary to protect the
Owner from loss because of:
9.5.2.1
Defective Work not remedied;
9.5.2.2
Damage caused by the Contractor;
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 38
4648000v1
9.5.2.3
9.6
Failure to comply with the requirements of Ohio Revised
Code Chapter 4115, "Wages and Hours on Public
Works."
9.5.3
If the basis for withholding payment pursuant to paragraph GC 9.5.2
is removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of
them.
9.5.4
Whenever the Owner receives a Claim Affidavit, the Owner shall
detain the stated amount from the Contractor's subsequent
Application for Payment unless the Contractor provides a release and
waiver of lien with the Application for Payment.
9.5.4.1
The release and waiver of lien shall be executed by the
person or entity supplying labor, materials or services on
a Project, which has or may have a right of lien against
the Contractor's proceeds.
9.5.4.2
If the Owner detains an amount as set forth above, such
action shall not be construed as conferring any right on
such Subcontractor or Material Supplier, nor as enlarging
or altering the application or effect of the existing lien
law.
FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
9.6.1
9.6.2
The Contractor, as a condition precedent to execution of the
certificate of Contract Completion and to final payment, shall
provide all documents required pursuant to paragraph GC 11.1.1 for
approval by the Owner and the Architect.
9.6.1.1
The Contractor shall execute an affidavit to certify that
the Contractor has complied with all requirements of
Ohio Revised Code Chapter 4115, "Wages and Hours on
Public Works."
9.6.1.2
The Contractor shall execute an affidavit to certify that all
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers have been paid in
full for all Work performed or materials furnished for the
Project.
Payment of the final Application for Payment shall be made within
30 days from the date of approval by the Owner.
9.6.2.1
The inability of a Contractor to complete Project closeout requirements within the time specified by the
Architect shall be grounds for withholding final payment.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 39
4648000v1
9.6.2.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
Payments due and not paid to the Contractor within such
30 day period shall bear interest from the date payment is
due under the Contract Documents at the average of the
prime rate established at the commercial banks in the City
of Bexley, Ohio.
The making of final payment by the Owner shall constitute a waiver
of all claims by the Owner except those arising after Contract
Completion including, without limitation, the following:
9.6.3.1
Defective or nonconforming Work resulting from latent
defects, fraud or gross mistakes;
9.6.3.2
Outstanding liens;
9.6.3.3
Failure of the Contractor to comply with any Warranties
required by the Contract Documents.
The acceptance of final payment by the Contractor shall constitute a
waiver of all claims against the Owner except those that the
Contractor has previously made in writing and which remain
unsettled at the time of final payment.
ARTICLE 10 - FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
10.1 CONTRACTOR’S PUNCH LIST
10.1.1 When the Work is near completion, the Contractor shall prepare a list
of all deficient items remaining on the Work. Said list shall be
known as the Contractor's Punch List.
10.1.1.1
The Contractor shall proceed to correct all items listed on
the Contractor's Punch List and verify that the deficient
items have been corrected by signing said Punch List.
10.1.1.2
The Contractor shall submit the signed Contractor's Punch
list to the Architect, with a copy to the Owner, together
with a request for a Final Inspection of the Work.
10.2 ARCHITECT’S PUNCH LIST
10.2.1 The Architect shall, within seven (7) days of receipt of the request
for Final Inspection, notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection
of the request for Final Inspection, stating reasons for any rejection.
10.2.1.1
Upon acceptance of the Contractor's request, the Architect
shall conduct the Final Inspection to determine whether
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 40
4648000v1
the Work is in conformity with the Contract Documents.
The Architect shall notify the Contractor, Owner and the
Owner of the scheduled time of the Final Inspection.
10.2.1.2
Within seven (7) days of the Final Inspection, the
Architect, with a copy to the Owner , shall notify the
Contractor of any items remaining in a deficient or
unacceptable condition. The list of such items shall be
known as the Architect's Punch List.
10.3 CORRECTION OF PUNCH LIST ITEMS
10.3.1 Within 30 days of receipt of the notice required by paragraph GC
10.2.1.2, the Contractor shall complete and correct all items
remaining on the Architect's Punch List.
10.3.1.1
If the Contractor does not complete the items on the
Architect's Punch List within 30 days of receipt of the
notice, the provisions of paragraph GC 5.2 shall be
invoked.
10.3.1.2
If the Work on the Architect's Punch List cannot be
completed within 30 days of receipt of the notice, the
Contractor shall justify, to the reasonable satisfaction of
the Architect and the Owner, the reasons the items cannot
be so completed, and the Contractor shall propose, for
approval by the Architect and the Owner, a time when
such items will be completed.
10.3.1.3
Failure of the Architect to include any items on the
Architect's Punch List shall not alter the responsibility of
the Contractor to complete all the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
10.4 CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACT COMPLETION
10.4.1 When all items on the Architect's Punch List items have been
corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner, and the
provisions of paragraphs GC 11.1 through 11.4 have been fulfilled,
the Architect shall process a certificate of Contract Completion. The
Owner reserves the right of Final Acceptance of the Project.
10.5 DEFERRED ITEMS
10.5.1 With the approval of the Architect and the Owner, when upon Final
Inspection, items of Work cannot be completed because of seasonal
condition, such as bituminous paving or landscaping, or if the Owner
agrees that a particular item need not be completed until a subsequent
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 41
4648000v1
date, the Owner may release payment to the Contractor less twice the
cost of completing the remaining Work as determined in the sole
discretion of the Owner.
ARTICLE 11 - CONTRACT COMPLETION
11.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
11.1.1 The Contractor, as a condition precedent to execution of the
certificate of Contract Completion, release of retainage and final
payment, shall provide all Project record documents to the Architect,
for approval, which may include, without limitation:
11.1.1.1
Certificate of Occupancy issued;
11.1.1.2
Inspection Certificates required and issued;
11.1.1.3
Letter of Approval from the Fire Marshal for fire
suppression system;
11.1.1.4
Operating and Maintenance Manuals, which shall be
organized into suitable sets of manageable size. Indexed
data shall be bound in individual binders, with pocket
folders for folded sheet information and appropriate
identification shall be marked on the front and the spine
of each binder;
11.1.1.5
Neatly and accurately marked sets of As-Built Drawings
and other Contract Documents reflecting the actual
construction of the Project;
11.1.1.6
Reproducible detailed Drawings reflecting the exact
location of any concealed utilities, mechanical or
electrical systems and components;
11.1.1.7
Assignment to the Owner of all Warranties and
Guarantees, including the most recent address and
telephone number of any Subcontractors, Material
Suppliers, or manufacturers;
11.1.1.8
An affidavit to certify that all Subcontractors and Material
Suppliers have been paid in full for all Work performed
or materials furnished for the Project;
11.1.1.9
Final certified payroll reports;
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 42
4648000v1
11.1.1.10 An affidavit to certify that the Contractor has complied
with all requirements of Ohio Revised Code Chapter
4115, "Wages and Hours on Public Works."
11.2 RECORD DRAWINGS
11.2.1 Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall organize the AsBuilt Drawings into manageable sets, bind the sets with durable
paper cover sheets, certify to the accuracy of the As-Built Drawings
by signature thereon, and deliver the As-Built Drawings to the
Architect.
11.2.2 The Architect shall revise the original contract Drawing tracings or
computer files with the information contained on the As-Built
Drawings provided by the Contractor. The revised original contract
Drawing tracings or computer files shall be labeled "Drawings of
Record" and reflect the date of the Architect's revision of the AsBuilt Drawings.
11.2.3 The Owner may thereafter use the Record Drawings for any purpose
relating to the Project including, without limitation, additions to or
completion of the Project.
11.3 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
11.3.1 The Contractor shall provide a Guarantee to the Owner that all Work
is in conformity with the Contract Documents and free from defects
in workmanship, materials and equipment for a period of one (1) year
or such longer period as specified in the Contract Documents. The
Bond shall remain in effect until the expiration of that period unless
the Contractor shall provide a maintenance Bond satisfactory to the
Owner in form and substance.
11.3.1.1
The Guarantee time period shall commence on the date of
approval of the certificate of Contract Completion by the
Owner, unless otherwise provided in writing.
11.3.1.2
The Guarantee time period for any incomplete or
uncorrected Work at the time of Partial Occupancy, if
any, shall commence with the date of approval of the
certificate of Contract Completion by the Owner, unless
otherwise provided in writing.
11.3.1.3
The Guarantee provided in this Article shall be in addition
to, and not in limitation of, any other Guarantee,
Warranty or remedy provided by law or by the Contract
Documents.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 43
4648000v1
11.3.2 The Contractor shall, prior to installing material or equipment which
is subject to a Warranty, provide a copy of the Warranty to the
Architect, for review and approval.
11.3.3 Should defects in the material or equipment become apparent within
the Warranty period, the Owner shall promptly notify the Contractor
in writing and provide a copy of said notice to the Architect.
11.3.3.1
Within ten (10) days of receipt of said notice, the
Contractor shall visit the Project in the company of the
Owner to determine the extent of all defects and shall
promptly repair or replace the Defective Work, including
all adjacent Work damaged as a result of such defects or
as a result of remedying the defects, whether or not such
adjacent Work was originally provided by the Contractor.
11.3.3.2
If the Defective Work is considered by the Owner to be
an emergency, the Owner may require the Contractor to
visit the Project within one (1) day of receipt of said
notice.
11.3.3.3
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the cost of
temporary materials or equipment required during the
repair or replacement of the Defective Work.
11.3.4 If the Contractor does not promptly repair or replace Defective
Work, the Owner may repair or replace such Defective Work and
charge the cost thereof to the Contractor or the Contractor's Surety.
11.3.5 Work which is repaired or replaced by the Contractor shall be
inspected and accepted by the Owner and shall be guaranteed by the
Contractor for one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the
corrective Work by the Owner.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 44
4648000v1
11.4 FINAL CLEANING
11.4.1 At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall restore all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents to
as near its original condition as practicable and clean the site of all
waste materials and rubbish attributable to the Work, including
without limitation:
11.4.1.1
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass
in doors and windows, leaving both sides of the glass in a
polished condition;
11.4.1.2
Replace chipped, scratched or broken glass or other
damaged transparent materials;
11.4.1.3
Remove excess glazing or caulking compound, and other
substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials;
11.4.1.4
Remove labels that are not permanent, remove marks,
stains and soiled spots from finished surfaces;
11.4.1.5
Remove dust, dirt, marks, stains, paint droppings and
other blemishes and leave in polished condition all
equipment and material with exposed finished surfaces,
including, without limitation, ceilings, walls, doors,
counter tops, piping, ductwork, air inlet and outlet
devices, hangers and supports, unit ventilators, aluminum
or stainless steel trim and finish hardware;
11.4.1.6
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes
to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and similar
foreign substances;
11.4.1.7
Vacuum carpeted surfaces, damp mop all hard floors,
sweep paved areas broom clean, rake grounds that are
neither paved nor planted to a smooth even-textured
surface, and broom clean and damp mop concrete floors;
11.4.1.8
Clean washable air filters or replace all air filters at the
Project;
11.4.1.9
Remove all waste materials and rubbish from any roof
surface and clean any roof drains;
11.4.1.10 Remove any temporary controls required pursuant to the
storm water pollution prevention plan and permit.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 45
4648000v1
11.4.2 At the completion of the Project, the Contractor shall clean all light
fixtures, which includes, without limitation, removing bugs, debris,
stains, rust and dirt, and replacing any burned out or substantially
diminished light bulbs.
11.4.3 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall strip, apply one (1) seal coat, two (2) finish coats of
wax and shall polish all resilient flooring, except waxless floors.
11.4.4 Should any Work be performed after a final cleaning by the
Contractor, the Contractor responsible for such Work shall clean any
affected area again as provided above so that upon Contract
Completion, the premises shall be left ready for occupancy by the
Owner.
11.4.5 Final cleaning shall be done to the reasonable satisfaction of the
Architect, and the Owner.
11.4.5.1
If the Contractor fails to clean up at completion of the
Work, the provision of paragraph GC 5.2 shall be
invoked.
11.4.5.2
If a dispute arises among Contractors as to responsibility
for final cleaning, the Owner or the Architect may
authorize another Contractor, or engage a qualified
cleaning company, to perform the clean up, and deduct
the cost from amounts due to those Contractors
responsible as the Architect recommend and the Owner
determines to be appropriate. The decision of the Owner
on the responsibility for such cost shall be final.
ARTICLE 12 - INSURANCE
12.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
12.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other
insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's performance or
obligations under the Contract Documents, whether due to action or
inaction by the Contractor or any person for whom the Contractor is
responsible.
12.1.1.1
Claims under workers' compensation, occupational
sickness or disease, disability benefit and other similar
employee benefit acts;
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 46
4648000v1
12.1.1.2
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, disease,
illness, death or personal injury, and other claims usually
covered by bodily injury liability insurance;
12.1.1.3
Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of
property and other claims usually covered by property
damage liability insurance.
12.1.2 A Commercial General Liability policy and Business Automobile
Liability policy, separately or combined, shall be maintained to
provide insurance as set forth below. Such Commercial General
Liability and Business Automobile Liability insurance may be either
Combined Single Limits or Split Limits as provided below. An
Umbrella or Excess Liability policy may be used in combination
with the Commercial General Liability and Business Automobile
insurance to meet such limits.
Policy Limits – Commercial General Liability
$2,000,000
$2,000,000
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
$100,000
$10,000
General Aggregate
Products/Completed Operations Aggregate
Occurrence Limit
Personal and Advertising Injury Limit
Fire Legal Liability Limit
Medical Payments
Policy Limits – Business Automobile
$500,000
Combined Single Limit
12.1.2.1
Contracts in the amount of $100,000 or less shall require
coverage in the amount of not less than $1 million general
aggregate and per occurrence.
12.1.2.2
Contracts in excess of $100,000 but not more than $5
million shall require coverage in the amount of not less
than $3 million general aggregate and per occurrence.
12.1.2.3
Contracts exceeding the amount of $5 million shall
require coverage in the amount of not less than $5 million
general aggregate and per occurrence.
12.1.2.4
Such policies shall be endorsed to provide that the
General Aggregate Limit applies separately to each of the
insured Contractor's projects.
12.1.3 For any demolition, blasting, excavating, tunneling, shoring or
similar operations, the Contractor shall provide and maintain
Property Damage Liability insurance with a limit of liability equal to
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 47
4648000v1
such limit as specified in the applicable sections of paragraphs GC
12.1.2.
12.2 BUILDER'S RISK - NEW CONSTRUCTION
12.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Owner
shall provide and maintain either directly or through a third party,
during the progress of the Work and until the execution of the
certificate of Contract Completion, a Builder's Risk insurance policy
to cover all Work in the course of construction including false work,
temporary buildings and structures and materials used in the
construction process, stored on site. Such insurance shall be on a
"Risk of Direct Physical Loss" form policy and shall insure against
the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage
including, without limitation, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief,
earthquake, tornado, lightning, explosion, breakage of glass, flood,
collapse and water damage. It shall also include debris removal,
demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal
requirement, and shall cover reasonable compensation for services
and expenses required to limit further loss.
12.2.1.1
Coverage must include provision to pay the reasonable
extra costs of expediting temporary and/or permanent
repairs to, or permanent replacement of, damaged
property. This shall include overtime wages and the extra
cost of "express" or other means for rapidly transporting
materials and supplies necessary to such repair or
replacement.
12.2.1.2
Such Builder's Risk policy shall protect both the
Contractor and the Owner from loss and provide coverage
for materials in transit or stored off site and identified for
the Project.
12.2.1.3
Coverage for other perils may be required if specified in
the Special Conditions.
12.2.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Builder's
Risk policy shall be written in the amount equal to 100 percent of the
Contract price, including landscaping, paving and other site Work.
12.2.3 The Builder's Risk policy shall specifically permit and allow for
partial occupancy by the Owner prior to acceptance of the Project.
12.3 INSURANCE POLICY REQUIREMENTS
12.3.1 Each policy of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by
the Contractor shall name the Owner and the Architect, as additional
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 48
4648000v1
insureds and each policy and respective Certificate of Insurance shall
expressly provide that no less than 30 days prior written notice shall
be given to the Owner in the event of cancellation, non-renewal,
expiration or material alteration of the coverage contained in such
policy or evidenced by such Certificate of Insurance.
12.3.2 The Contractor shall furnish the Owner, when requested, a certified
copy of any insurance or additional insured endorsement required to
be purchased or maintained by the Contract Documents. In no event
shall any failure of the Owner to demand a certified copy of any
required insurance or insured endorsement be construed as a waiver
of the obligation of the Contractor to obtain insurance required to be
purchased or maintained by the Contract Documents.
12.3.3 The Contractor shall maintain all insurance in the required amounts,
without interruption, from the date of the execution of the Contract
until the date of approval of the certificate of Contract Completion by
the Owner. Failure to maintain the required insurance during the
time specified shall be cause for termination of the Contract.
12.3.4 Insurance policies required to be purchased and maintained by the
Contractor may include a reasonable loss deductible, which shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to pay in the event of loss.
12.3.5 The prompt repair or reconstruction of the Work as a result of an
insured loss or damage shall be the Contractor's responsibility and
shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner.
12.4 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION
12.4.1 The Owner and the Contractor waive all rights against each other for
damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent of actual
recovery of any insurance proceeds under any property insurance
obtained pursuant to this Article or other property insurance
applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds
of such insurance.
ARTICLE 13 - CONTRACT TERMINATION
13.1 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK
13.1.1 If, in the judgment of the Owner, the Contractor is causing undue
risk of damage to any part of the Project or adjacent area, the Owner
may suspend the Work temporarily, either wholly or in part, for such
period until, in the judgment of the Owner, the safe and proper
prosecution of the Work may be resumed. The Owner shall provide
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 49
4648000v1
notice to the Contractor's Surety of any suspension ordered pursuant
to this Article.
13.1.1.1
In case of
appropriate,
Documents
Contractor
therefrom.
such suspension, an extension of time, if
will be allowed as provided in the Contract
but no payment will be made to the
for any expense or damages resulting
13.1.1.2
Any failure of the Owner to suspend the Work shall not
relieve the Contractor of the Contractor's responsibility to
perform the Work safely and in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
13.1.2 The Contractor shall, upon receipt of notice of suspension, cease
Work on the suspended activities and take all necessary or
appropriate steps to limit disbursements and minimize costs with
respect thereto. The Contractor shall furnish a report to the Owner,
with a copy to the Architect , within five (5) days of receipt of the
notice of suspension, describing the status of the Work, including
without limitation, results accomplished, conclusions resulting
therefrom, and such other information as the Owner may require.
13.1.3 In the event of suspension under this Article, the Contractor shall be
entitled to payment of compensation due under the Contract
Documents, upon submission of a proper invoice, for the Work
performed prior to receipt of notice of suspension, which shall be
payable based upon the Contract Cost Breakdown.
13.2 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE
13.2.1 The Owner may, at any time upon 10 days written notice to the
Contractor, terminate the Contract in whole or in part for the Owner's
convenience and without cause.
13.2.2 Upon receipt of the notice of termination for convenience, the
Contractor shall immediately, in accordance with instructions from
the Owner, proceed with performance of the following duties.
13.2.2.1
Cease operation as specified in the notice;
13.2.2.2
Place no further orders and enter into no further
subcontracts for materials, labor, services or facilities
except as necessary to complete continued portions of the
Project;
Terminate all subcontracts and orders to the extent they
relate to the Work terminated;
13.2.2.3
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 50
4648000v1
13.2.2.4
Proceed to complete the performance of any Work not
terminated;
13.2.2.5
Take actions that may be necessary, or that the Owner
may direct, for the protection and preservation of the
terminated Work.
13.2.3 Upon such termination, the Contractor shall be paid in accordance
with the Contract Cost Breakdown for Work completed, including
any amount retained, and the value of materials ordered and
delivered, less any salvage credit the Contractor may receive for
them.
13.2.3.1
All materials, equipment, facilities and supplies at the
Project site, or stored off site, for which the Contractor
has been compensated, shall become property of the
Owner.
13.2.3.2
The Contractor shall be entitled to a fair and reasonable
profit for all Work performed and all expenses directly
attributable to the termination of the contract. In no event
shall the Contractor's compensation exceed the total
Contract price.
13.2.3.3
Any dispute as to the sum then payable to the Contractor
shall be resolved in accordance with the provisions of GC
Article 8 of the General Conditions.
13.3 TERMINATION FOR CAUSE
13.3.1 If the Owner determines that the Contractor has failed to prosecute
the Work with the necessary force, or has refused to remedy any
Defective Work, the Owner shall notify the Contractor and the
Contractor's Surety of such failure or refusal. The Contractor shall
begin to cure such failure or refusal within three (3) days of receipt
of the notice.
13.3.2 If the Contractor fails to cure such failure or refusal within 10 days of
receipt of the notice, the Owner may terminate the Contract and
employ upon the Work the additional force, or supply the materials
or such part of either as is appropriate, and may remove Defective
Work.
13.3.3 If the Contractor is so terminated, the Contractor's Surety shall have
the option to perform the Contract. If the Contractor's Surety does
not commence performance of the Contract within ten (10) days of
the date on which the Contract was terminated, the Owner may
complete the Work by such means as the Owner deems appropriate.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 51
4648000v1
The Owner may take possession of and use all materials, facilities
and equipment at the Project site or stored off site.
13.3.4 If the Contractor is so terminated, the Contractor shall not be entitled
to any further payment. If the Owner completes the Work and if the
cost of completing the Work exceeds the balance of the Contract
price, including compensation for all direct and consequential
damages incurred by the Owner as a result of the termination, such
excess shall be paid by the Contractor or the Contractor's Surety.
13.3.5 If the Contractor's Surety performs the Work, the provisions of the
Contract Documents shall govern such Surety's performance, with
the Surety being substituted for the Contractor in all such provisions
including, without limitation, provisions for payment for the Work
and provisions about the right of the Owner to complete the Work.
13.4 CONTRACTOR BANKRUPTCY
13.4.1 If the Contractor shall file a voluntary petition in bankruptcy or shall
have an involuntary petition in bankruptcy filed against the
Contractor, or if the Contractor makes a general assignment for the
benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed for all or a
substantial part of the Contractor's business or property, the Owner
shall serve written notice on the Contractor and the Contractor's
Surety stating that any failure of the Contractor to provide adequate
assurances of continued performance will be considered a rejection
of the Contract, which shall result in termination of the Contract for
cause. Such termination of the Contract need not be evidenced by an
order of any court rejecting the Contract.
13.4.1.1
Upon a final determination, either by a court or by
arbitrators having jurisdiction, that the termination
pursuant to paragraph GC 13.4.1 was improper, the
termination will be deemed to be a termination for
convenience.
13.4.1.2
The Contractor's sole remedy for a wrongful declaration
of default by the Owner shall be limited to recovery of
profit on Work completed prior to such declaration and
reasonable expenses directly attributable to the
termination of the contract.
ARTICLE 14 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
14.1 DESCRIPTION
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 52
4648000v1
14.1.1 Shop Drawings, Samples and other submittals shall be provided by
the Contractor for any item required by the Contract Documents but
not fully described in the Drawings and Specifications, unless
waived by the Architect, and shall include, without limitation:
14.1.1.1
Construction of the various parts, method of jointery, type
of material, grade, quality and thickness of material, alloy
of material, profiles of all sections, reinforcement, method
of hanging doors or installing windows, anchorage, type
and grade of finish.
14.1.1.2
Capacities, types of materials and performance charts that
are pertinent to the materials and performance charts that
are pertinent to the equipment item. Wiring diagrams,
control diagrams, schematic diagrams, working and
erection dimensions, arrangement and specifications.
14.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
14.2.1 The Contractor shall provide a submittal letter and shall stamp and
submit the Shop Drawings or other submittals to the Architect, in
accordance with a schedule established by the Architect, the
Contractor and the Contractor.
14.2.1.1
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall submit six (6) prints of all Shop
Drawings and six (6) copies of any other submittal.
14.2.1.2
The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete
with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified
performance and design criteria, materials and similar
data to show the Architect the materials and equipment
which the Contractor proposes to provide.
14.2.1.3
Each Sample will be identified clearly as to material,
supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the
use for which intended and other uses as the Architect
may require to enable the Architect to review the
submittal.
14.3 VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
14.3.1 If the Shop Drawings or other submittals show variations from the
requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall make
specific mention of such variations in the Contractor's letter of
submittal to the Architect.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 53
4648000v1
14.3.1.1
If the variation is acceptable to the Architect, the
Architect shall recommend acceptance of the variation to
the Owner for approval.
14.3.1.2
The Contractor shall not be relieved of any responsibility
for deviations from the requirements of the Contract
Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings
or Samples.
14.4 CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW
14.4.1 All Shop Drawings, Samples and other submittals shall be reviewed
and stamped by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect. If
it is apparent to the Architect that the Contractor has not reviewed
the submittals, or has conducted an incomplete review, the Architect
shall reject the submittals.
14.4.1.1
Correction of dimensions, location of various items,
encroachments of Work of other Contractors or variations
from the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be
made or corrected by the Contractor.
14.4.1.2
If required by the Contract Documents or applicable law,
the Contractor shall have the Shop Drawings or other
submittals prepared by persons and entities possessing
expertise and experience in an appropriate trade or
profession or by a licensed architect, engineer or other
professional.
14.5 ARCHITECT’S REVIEW
14.5.1 The Architect shall review and approve or disapprove Shop
Drawings, Samples or other submittals within 15 days of receipt or in
accordance with the approved submittal schedule or such other
period of time as is mutually agreed by the Architect and the
Contractor.
14.5.1.1
The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the
Architect and shall resubmit the required number of
corrected copies of Shop Drawings, product data,
Samples or other submittals until approved, which
resubmission shall be acted upon by the Architect with 15
days of receipt or such other period of time as is mutually
agreed by the Architect and the Contractor.
14.5.1.2
When resubmitting submittals, the Contractor shall direct
the Architect's attention to any revisions made by noting
such revisions on the resubmitted submittal.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 54
4648000v1
14.5.1.3
All costs incurred by the Architect in reviewing
resubmittals of resubmittals, for reason of failure of the
initial submittal to meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents, shall be paid by the Contractor.
14.6 RISK OF NONPAYMENT
14.6.1 No portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or other submittal
shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by the
Architect. Any Work commenced by the Contractor prior to final
approval of the Shop Drawings or other submittal by the Architect
shall be performed by the Contractor under risk that no payment will
be approved or made by the Owner for such Work.
14.7 SCOPE OF ARCHITECT’S REVIEW
14.7.1 The Architect shall review and approve or take other appropriate
action upon Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product
Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action shall
be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay
provided that submittals are delivered to the Architect by the
Contractor in a timely manner in accordance with a submittal
schedule agreed upon by the Contractor and Architect. Review of
such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the
accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and
quantities or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performance of equipment or systems designed by the Contractor, all
of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor to the extent
required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review shall
not constitute approval of safety precautions or unless otherwise
specifically stated by the Architect, of construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a
specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the
item is a component. When professional certification of performance
characteristics of materials, systems or equipment is required by the
Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon such
certification to establish that the materials, systems or equipment will
meet the performance criteria required by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 15 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS
15.1 OWNER’S APPROVAL
15.1.1 Within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall
submit the Contractor's proposed Subcontractors and Material
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 55
4648000v1
Suppliers to the Architect, with a copy to the Owner, for the Owner’s
approval.
15.1.1.1
The Owner reserves the right to reject any Subcontractor
or Material Supplier. Failure of the Architect to notify the
Contractor of rejection within ten (10) days shall
constitute notice that the Owner has no objection.
15.1.1.2
If the Owner rejects any Subcontractor or Material
Supplier, the Contractor shall replace the Subcontractor or
Material Supplier at no additional cost to the Owner.
15.2 REPLACEMENT
15.2.1 The Contractor shall not replace any Subcontractor or Material
Supplier after execution of the Contract without written approval of
the Owner.
15.2.1.1
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, a written
justification for the change of the Contractor's
Subcontractors or Material Suppliers.
15.3 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
15.3.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all acts and omissions of
the Contractor's Subcontractors and Material Suppliers and shall be
responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of the
Contractor's Subcontractors and Material Suppliers.
15.3.1.1
Delays, interference, disruption, hindrance attributable to
the Contractor's Subcontractors or Material Suppliers
shall be deemed to be within the control of the Contractor.
15.3.1.2
The Contractor shall require that each of the Contractor's
Subcontractors have a competent supervisor at the Project
whenever Work is being performed by the Subcontractor.
15.3.1.3
The Contractor agrees to bind the Contractor's
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers to the terms of the
Contract Documents, so far as applicable to the Work of
such Subcontractor or Material Supplier.
15.4 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
15.4.1 The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor and Material
Supplier to fully warrant and guarantee, for the benefit of the Owner,
the effectiveness, fitness for the purpose intended, quality and
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 56
4648000v1
merchantability of any Work performed or item provided or installed
by such Subcontractor or Material Supplier.
15.5 PROMPT PAYMENT
15.5.1 If a Subcontractor or Material Supplier requests payment in time to
allow the Contractor to include the request in the Contractor's
Application for Payment, the Contractor shall pay within ten (10)
days after receipt of payment from the Owner:
15.5.1.1
To a Subcontractor an amount equal to percent of
completion allowed by the Owner for the Subcontractor's
Work,
15.5.1.2
To a Material Supplier an amount equal to all or a portion
of the Material Supplier's request for materials furnished.
15.5.2 The Contractor may reduce the amount to be paid to a Subcontractor
or Material Supplier pursuant to paragraph GC 15.5.1 by the amount
of any retainage withheld from the Contractor and may withhold
amounts necessary to resolve disputed liens or claims involving the
Work of the Subcontractor or Material Supplier.
ARTICLE 16 - INDEMNIFICATION
16.1 INDEMNIFICATION FOR INJURY OR DAMAGE
16.1.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify
and hold harmless the Owner, the Owner and the Architect, their
respective officers, consultants, agents and employees, in both
individual and official capacities, from and against all claims,
damages, losses and expenses, direct, indirect or consequential
arising out of or resulting from the Work.
16.1.1.1
In the event of any such injury, including death, or loss or
damage, or claims therefor, the Contractor shall give
prompt notice thereof to the , Architect and the Owner.
16.1.2 The indemnification obligations of the Contractor under paragraph
GC 16.1.1 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the
Architect's consultants, agents or employees for negligent
preparation or approval of Drawings, Specification, Change Orders,
opinions, and any other responsibility of the Architect, except to the
extent covered by the Contractor's insurance.
16.2 INDEMNIFICATION FOR PATENT OR COPYRIGHT USE
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 57
4648000v1
16.2.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall
indemnify, hold harmless, and defend the Owner, and the Architect
and
their respective members, officers, consultants, agents,
representatives and employees, in both individual and official
capacities from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses
arising out of the Contractor’s infringement of patent rights or
copyrights.
ARTICLE 17 - AUDITS AND RECORDS
17.1 EXAMINATION
17.1.1 The Owner shall have the right to examine all books, records,
documents and other data of the Contractor and of the Contractor's
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers related to the bidding, pricing
or performance of the Work.
17.1.2 The above referenced materials shall be made available at the office
of the Contractor, Subcontractor or Material Supplier, as applicable,
at all reasonable times for inspection, audit and reproduction until the
expiration of six (6) years after the date of acceptance of the Project
by the Owner.
17.1.3 To the extent that the Contractor, Subcontractor or Material Supplier,
as applicable, informs the Owner in writing that any documents
copied by the Owner are trade secrets, the Owner shall treat such
documents as trade secrets of the Contractor, Subcontractor or
Material Supplier, as applicable. In the event any dispute arises with
any other person about whether such other person should be given
access to the documents, the Contractor, Subcontractor or Material
Supplier, as applicable, agrees to indemnify the Owner against all
costs, expenses, and damages, including without limitation attorney
fees, incurred by reason of that dispute.
17.2 The right of inspection, audit and reproduction shall extend to all documents
necessary to permit adequate evaluation of the cost of pricing data submitted
along with the computations and projections used therein.
17.3 If the Contract has been terminated, in whole or in part, the records relating
to the Work terminated shall be made available to Owner for a period of three
(3) years from the date of any applicable final settlement.
17.4 Records which relate to disputes, litigation, or settlement of claims arising
out of the performance of the Work shall be made available until such
dispute, litigation or claims have been finally decided or settled.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 58
4648000v1
ARTICLE 18 - PREVAILING WAGE PAYROLL SUBMITTALS
18.1 Within ten (10) days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall
provide the Owner’s Prevailing Wage Coordinator a schedule of dates during
the term of the Contract on which wages will be paid to employees for the
Project.
18.2 The Contractor shall submit payroll reports with each Application for
Payment, which reports shall be certified by the Contractor that the payroll is
correct and complete and the wage rates shown are not less than those
required by the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting
all payroll reports of the Contractor's Subcontractors.
18.2.1 The payroll report shall indicate the period covered and shall include
a list containing the name, address and social security number of
each employee of the Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors
paid for the Work.
18.2.2 The payroll report shall list the number of hours each employee
worked each day on the Project during the reporting period, the total
hours each week on the Project, the employee's hourly rate of pay,
job classification, fringe benefits and all deductions from wages and
net pay.
18.2.3 The payroll report shall also list each fringe benefit and state if it is
paid as cash to the employee or to a named plan. For each employee
listed, the payroll report shall list the employee’s gender and
ethnicity. The report shall classify ethnicity as Black, Hispanic,
Asian Pacific Islanders, American Indians/Alaskan Natives. All
others are considered non minority.
18.2.4 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall also submit
apprenticeship agreements for all apprentices utilized on the Project.
ARTICLE 19 - MISCELLANEOUS
19.1 TAXES
19.1.1 Only those materials which ultimately become a part of the
completed structure or improvement which constitutes the Project
will be exempt from State sales tax as provided in Section 5739.02,
ORC, and State use tax as provided in Section 5741.01, ORC.
19.1.2 The purchase, lease or rental of material, equipment, parts or
expendable items such as form lumber, tools, oils, greases and fuels,
which are used in connection with the Work, are subject to the
application of State sales tax and State use tax.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 59
4648000v1
19.2 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
19.2.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties, license fees and assume all
costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the
incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product
or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by
others.
19.2.2 If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is
specified in the Contract Documents and if, to the knowledge of the
Architect, use of the specified item is subject to patent rights or
copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by the Architect
in the Contract Documents.
19.2.2.1
If the Contractor has reason to believe that use of the
specified item is subject to patent or copyright protection,
the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner.
19.3 ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST CLAIMS
19.3.1 By executing the Contract, the Contractor assigns, conveys and
transfers to the Owner any right, title and interest to any claims or
causes of action it may have or acquire under State or federal
antitrust laws relating to any goods, products, or services purchased,
procured or rendered to the Owner pursuant to the Contract.
19.4 USE OF DOMESTIC STEEL
19.4.1 The Contractor is required to supply domestically produced steel
products used for load bearing structural purposes on this Project.
19.4.2 The Contractors, subcontractors and suppliers shall comply with the
requirements of the State of Ohio’s policy regarding the specification
and use of domestically produced steel products, including furnishing
the required certifications.
The policy is available at Ohio
Department of Administrative Services web site at:
http://www.gsd.das.ohio.gov/sao/info/steelpolicy.pdf.
19.5 PROJECT SIGNAGE
19.5.1 No signage, including contractor identification signage, trade
association signage or other advertising shall be permitted on or in
the Project without the Owner’s specific prior written approval,
which may be withheld at his sole discretion.
19.6 DRUG FREE WORKPLACE PROGRAM PARTICIPATION
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 60
4648000v1
19.6.1 Bidders are required to be enrolled in and to be in good standing in
an Ohio Bureau of Worker’s Compensation (OBWC) Drug-Free
Workplace Program (DFWP) or an equivalent OBWC-approved
DFWP in accordance with, but not limited to, Ohio Administrative
Code Chapter 4123-17 and Executive Order 2002-13T.
19.6.2 By entering into this Contract the Contractor agrees that it will
require each of its subcontractors which provide labor on the Project
site to be enrolled in an OBWC-approved DFWP.
General Contractor
June24, 2014
GC - 61
4648000v1
City of Bexley
Bexley Square – City Hall Renovation Project
STANARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE AND PRICING GUIDELINES
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE
A.
B.
C.
Depending on the cost of the change in the Work and the urgency of proceeding
with the Work, two (2) methods of executing a Change Order are available:
1.
Change Order via Field Work Order (FWO) - a change in the Work
initiated by a FWO.
2.
Change Order via regular process - a change in the Work approved
pursuant to a three (3) step process: 1) justification letter/Bulletin, 2)
recommendation/pricing, and 3) execution of a Change Order.
The Architect and the Owner’s Representative have responsibility for:
1.
Preparing, reviewing, recommending, coordinating, monitoring and
processing a Change Order and related documents.
2.
Reviewing the Contractor's pricing within the stated time period, verifying
the pricing complies with the Pricing Guidelines and negotiating pricing,
if necessary, to a reasonable amount.
3.
If the change is based on a not to exceed price based on performing the
Work on a time and material basis, monitoring the Work and sign daily
time tickets. If the changed Work should cost less than the maximum
amount noted on the Change Order, the Owner’s Representative is also
responsible for preparing a deduct Change Order for the cost difference.
4.
Reviewing and resolving the Contractor's request for an extension of time
related to a Change Order.
5.
Confirming that the Owner concurs with the change and has available
funds or a written commitment for funding the Change Order.
6.
Monitoring the overall Change Order process for timeliness and follow up.
7.
Informing the Contractor not to proceed with the Work until receipt of
required authorization.
The Contractor has responsibility for:
1.
Responding to requests for pricing within the stated time period.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
CO - 1
2.
Preparing all necessary pricing, including Subcontractor and Material
Supplier pricing, according to the Pricing Guidelines.
3.
If the change is based on a not to exceed price based on performing the
Work on a time and material basis, furnishing and certifying detailed
records of all labor and materials provided. If the changed Work should
cost less than the maximum amount noted on the Change Order, the
Contractor is also responsible for executing a deduct Change Order
prepared for the cost difference.
4.
Proceeding with the Work upon receipt of one of the following
authorizations which is appropriate for the circumstances:
5.
D.
a)
A fully signed FWO;
b)
An Owner’s authorization letter;
c)
A fully signed Change Order.
If the Contractor performs Work without the appropriate, required
authorization, the Contractor does so at the Contractor's own risk that
payment for such Work may not be approved or made.
Change Order via FWO Process
The Architect, with the assistance of the Owner’s Representative, shall:
1.
Verify with the Owner that the change is requested or required.
2.
Prepare a detailed scope of work, including any necessary drawings and a
preliminary cost estimate.
3.
With the prior approval of the Owner, release the scope of work to the
Contractor with a date specified for the Contractor to return a Proposal. If
the Contractor fails to respond to the Architect, through the Owner’s
Representative, within the time specified, or as otherwise agreed to in
writing by the Contractor and the Architect, the Contractor shall be
responsible for any additional costs incurred by other Contractors, the
Architect and the Owner’s Representative resulting from any attendant
delay.
4.
Review the Contractor's Proposal, verifying that pricing complies with the
Pricing Guidelines and negotiate the price as required. Within seven (7)
days of receipt of the Contractor's Proposal, the Architect, with a copy to
the Owner’s Representative, shall notify the Contractor whether the
Proposal is acceptable or advise the Contractor in writing of the reason for
disapproval.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
CO - 2
5.
Determine the basis for pricing the Work and confirm whether the FWO is
for a fixed price, or for a not to exceed price based on performing the
Work on a time and material basis. Verify that any Subcontractor and
Material Supplier pricing is included and complies with the Pricing
Guidelines. Review any requested time extension with the Owner to be
determined according to paragraph GC 7.4.
6.
Prepare the FWO and Change Order, complete with the scope of work and
cost. Sign and obtain the signatures of the Owner and the Contractor.
Distribute the signed FWO to the Contractor as authority to proceed.
Distribute copies of the FWO to the Owner and the Owner’s
Representative.
7.
Concurrent with signing the FWO, whenever possible, prepare the Change
Order, but in no event later than ten (10) days after the date of the FWO
authorization, regardless of the status of the Work or type of pricing.
Complete the Change Order and prepare a package consisting of, in the
following order, the Change Order, an original signed FWO, the
Contractor's Proposal and the scope of work.
8.
Deliver multiple copies of the signed Change Order package to the Owner
for signing.
Upon approval by the Owner, copies of the executed Change Order will be
returned to the Contractor, the Architect and the Owner’s Representative.
The Contractor may bill for Work covered by the Change Order only
after this final step.
E.
Change Order via Regular Process
In circumstances when a change to the Work is requested by the Owner, the
Architect, with the assistance of the Owner’s Representative, shall:
1.
Verify with the Owner that the change is requested.
2.
Prepare a detailed scope of work in Bulletin form, including any necessary
drawings and a preliminary cost estimate.
3.
Submit the Bulletin to the Owner for approval.
4.
Upon receipt of approval by the Owner, release the Bulletin to the
Contractor with a date specified for the Contractor to return a Proposal. If
the Contractor fails to respond to the Architect, with a copy to the
Owner’s Representative, within the time specified, or as otherwise agreed
to in writing by the Contractor and the Architect, the Contractor shall be
responsible for any additional costs incurred by other Contractors, the
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
CO - 3
Owner’s Representative and the Architect resulting from any attendant
delay.
5.
Review the Contractor's Proposal, verifying that pricing complies with the
Pricing Guidelines and negotiate the price as required. Within seven (7)
days of receipt of the Contractor's Proposal, the Architect shall, with a
copy to the Owner’s Representative, notify the Contractor whether the
Proposal is acceptable or advise the Contractor in writing of the reasons
for disapproval.
6.
Determine the basis for pricing the Work and confirm whether the Work is
for a fixed price, or for a not to exceed price based on performing the
Work on a time and material basis. Verify that any Subcontractor and
Material Supplier pricing is included and complies with the Pricing
Guidelines. Review any requested time extension with the Owner to be
determined according to paragraph GC 7.4.
7.
Submit the Proposal to the Owner for approval, along with the written
recommendation of approval or disapproval of the Proposal from the
Architect and the Owner’s Representative.
8.
Upon receipt of approval by the Owner, complete the Change Order.
Prepare a package consisting of, in the following order, the Change Order,
indication of the Owner’s approval of the recommendation, the written
recommendation of approval or disapproval of the Proposal from the
Architect and the Owner’s Representative, indication of the Owner’s
approval of the Contractor's Proposal and the Bulletin.
9.
Deliver multiple copies of the signed Change Order package to the Owner
for signing.
Upon approval, copies of the executed Change Order will be returned to
the Contractor, the Architect, the Owner’s Representative and the Owner.
The Contractor may bill for Work covered by the Change Order only
after this final step.
F.
Paperwork Consolidation
1.
G.
Related transactions of one Contractor occurring at or about the same time
shall, whenever possible, be consolidated into the same Bulletin or
Change Order, or both.
Change Order Numbering System
1.
The Owner’s Representative shall assign a number to each change.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
CO - 4
CHANGE ORDER PRICING GUIDELINES
For each change, the Contractor shall furnish a detailed, written Proposal itemized
according to these Pricing Guidelines. Any Subcontractor or Material Supplier
pricing shall also be itemized according to these Pricing Guidelines. In order to
expedite the review and approval process, all Proposals shall be prepared in the
categories and in the order listed below.
A.
LABOR - All field labor shall be priced at the current base rate, excluding fringe
benefits, of the prevailing wage in the Project locality. The payroll is to be based
on straight time only and is to include number of hours and rate of pay for each
classification of worker. If overtime is approved, list only the straight time
portion in this item.
B.
FRINGES - All established payroll taxes, assessments and fringe benefits on the
labor in item A. This may include, without limitation, FICA, Federal and State
Unemployment, Health and Welfare, Pension Funds, Workers' Compensation and
Apprentice Fund. Each of the fringes is to be a separate line item.
C.
EQUIPMENT RENTALS - All charges for certain non-owned heavy or
specialized equipment at up to 100 percent of the documented rental cost. No
rental charges will be allowed for hand tools, minor equipment, simple scaffolds,
etc. Downtime due to repairs, maintenance and weather delays will not be
allowed.
D.
OWNED EQUIPMENT - All charges for certain owned, heavy or specialized
equipment at up to 100 percent of the cost listed by the current edition of the
Associated Equipment Dealers Green Book Rental Rates and Specifications for
Construction Equipment. No recovery will be allowed for hand tools, minor
equipment, simple scaffolds, etc. The longest period of time that the equipment is
to be required for the Work will be the basis for the pricing. Downtime due to
repairs, maintenance and weather delays will not be allowed.
E.
TRUCKING - A reasonable delivery charge or per-mile trucking charge for
delivery of required materials or equipment. Charges for use of a pick-up truck
will not be allowed.
F.
OVERHEAD - Overhead on items A, B, C, D, and E: Up to 10 percent, which
shall include all costs required to schedule the work and coordinate with the
Contractors.
1.
Overhead includes, without limitation, telephone, telephone charges,
facsimile, telegrams, postage, photos, photocopying, hand tools, simple
scaffolds (one level high), tool breakage, tool repairs, tool replacement,
tool blades, tool bits, home office estimating and expediting, home office
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
CO - 5
clerical and accounting support, home office labor (management,
supervision, engineering*), legal services, travel and parking expenses.
2.
G.
*An exception is allowed for shop or engineering labor on item in F.1
above, which shall not be subject to prevailing wage rates, for steel
fabricators, sheet metal fabricators and sprinkler system fabricators.
Recovery for such matters will be allowed under items A and B of these
Pricing Guidelines.
MATERIALS
1.
All materials purchased by the Contractor and incorporated into the
changed Work, showing costs, quantities, or Unit Prices of all items, as
appropriate. Reimbursement of material costs shall only be allowed in the
amount of the Contractor's actual cost, including any and all discounts,
rebates or related credits.
2.
A proportionate share of the cost of reusable materials for each use, such
as formwork lumber, shoring or temporary enclosures.
H.
PROFIT - Profit on items A, B, C, D, E, F and G: Up to 5 percent.
I.
SUBCONTRACTOR - The reasonable cost of all labor and material provided by
a Subcontractor whose pricing is included and which complies with these Pricing
Guidelines.
J.
CONTRACTOR MARK-UP ON SUBCONTRACTOR - Mark-up on item I: Up
to 5 percent.
K.
MISCELLANEOUS - The following items are allowable at the cost of the Work,
with no overhead or profit.
1.
The cost of extending the Bond and the cost of extending liability,
property damage, builder's risk or specialty coverage insurance.
2.
The premium portion only for approved overtime (labor and fringes). The
straight time portion is included in items A and B.
3.
Fees for permits, licenses, inspections, tests, etc.
4.
When requested by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Owner
due to special circumstances, reimbursement will be paid for overnight
lodging, travel and food based on the amounts used by the State of Ohio
for its construction projects.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
CO - 6
L.
M.
Costs which will not be reimbursed for Change Order Work include the
following:
1.
Employee Profit Sharing Plans - regardless of how defined or described,
the Contractor will pay these charges from Contractor profit and will not
be reimbursed.
2.
Voluntary Employee Deductions - examples are United Way and U.S.
Savings Bonds, etc.
State sales tax shall be allowed on items as defined by paragraph GC 20.1.
General Contractor
June 24, 2014
CO - 7
PROJECT MANUAL
PROJECT:
BEXLEY CITY HALL
2232 East Main Street
Bexley, Ohio 43206
PREPARED BY:
GRA+D Architects
330 W. Spring Street
Suite 355
Columbus, Ohio 43215
June 2014
Bexley City Hall
Division
2232 E. Main St.
Section Title
1014-0001
Pages
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
017300
EXCECUTION
8
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
6
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033543
POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING
2
DIVISION 05 - METALS
057000
DECORATIVE METAL
057500
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
6
4
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
064116
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
6
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071413
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
072100
THERMAL INSULATION
074213
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
075323
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
077100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
4
5
8
8
7
7
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084226
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
087100
DOOR HARDWARE
088000
GLAZING
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092900
GYPSUM BOARD
9
5
10
6
32
9
5
7
Bexley City Hall
093013
095113
096513
096813
099123
2232 E. Main St.
CERAMIC TILING
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
TILE CARPETING
INTERIOR PAINTING
1014-0001
9
6
3
5
6
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
102113
STAINLESS STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102819
TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
104413
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
5
3
4
4
3
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
122413
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
123623
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
5
4
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.3
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions
of the building.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.
EXECUTION
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or
increase deflection
017300 - 1
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety.
4.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical
systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
EXECUTION
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
017300 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2.
B.
2.
3.
3.2
1014-0001
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
C.
2232 E. Main St.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.
B.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
Bexley City Hall
3.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1.
2.
3.5
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect or Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent
benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent
benchmarks or control points to Architect and Construction Manager before proceeding.
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and
90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
EXECUTION
017300 - 4
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
3.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EXECUTION
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
017300 - 5
Bexley City Hall
F.
2.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching
and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
3.7
1014-0001
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1.
G.
2232 E. Main St.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction personnel.
1.
2.
EXECUTION
Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for
Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable
timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual
construction progress.
Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of
the Work depend on Owner's construction.
017300 - 6
Bexley City Hall
3.8
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a.
Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
3.9
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
EXECUTION
017300 - 7
Bexley City Hall
C.
3.10
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
017300 - 8
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.2
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated
to be salvaged or reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,
prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
C.
Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise
indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
1.3
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B.
Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1.
1.4
Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.5
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
B.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
C.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so
as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties
include the following:
1.
B.
Roofing.
Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying
that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation
at Project closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and
hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing
conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
C.
Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
1.
D.
3.2
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs or video.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
B.
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas
to be selectively demolished.
1.
Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.
2.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and
components indicated on Drawings to be removed.
a.
b.
c.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material and leave in place.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 3
Bexley City Hall
d.
e.
3.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and
finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of
construction being demolished.
1.
C.
3.5
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 4
Bexley City Hall
6.
7.
8.
9.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.6
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at
least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from
reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove
remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and
remove.
D.
Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations
in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings."
E.
Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing
and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.
1.
2.
Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.
Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 5
Bexley City Hall
3.7
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved
construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.8
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 1 - SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHINGGENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes polished concrete finishing, including staining.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete not designated as polished
concrete.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Polishing Schedule: Submit plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of polishing
operations for each area of polished concrete before start of polishing operations. Include
locations of all joints, including construction joints.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product requiring color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed color.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Field Sample Area: After approval of verification sample and before beginning full scale work,
produce a field sample area to demonstrate the approved range of selections made under Sample
submittals. Area size approximately 48 by 48 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) minimum, to
demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and appearance variations.
1.
2.
1.5
Locate sample area, as directed by Architect.
Maintain sample area during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING
033543 - 1
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A.
Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of
inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates,
hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Chem Tech 1
Densifier or Architect approved comparable product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
POLISHING
A.
Polish: Level 4: Gloss shine, 3000 grit.
B.
Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to match accepted sample
area.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth.
Apply reactive stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and
according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time
between successive coats.
Apply penetrating stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Continue polishing with progressively finer-grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to
match approved mockup.
Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations.
Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.
END OF SECTION 033543
POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING
033543 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 057000 - DECORATIVE METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Decorative mechanical grilles and frames.
2.
Exterior metal gate
COORDINATION
A.
1.4
Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative metal items. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative metal.
1.
2.
Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details.
Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative metal member, fittings, joinery,
finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative metal similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
DECORATIVE METAL
057000 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store decorative metal in a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and
protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
B.
Deliver and store cast-metal products in wooden crates surrounded by enough packing material
to ensure that products are not cracked or otherwise damaged.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
decorative metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Use materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
Use materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or
blemishes.
STEEL AND IRON
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
B.
Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M unless
otherwise indicated.
E.
Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel or structural steel,
exposed.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
Uncoated-Steel Items: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed, Type 304 stainlesssteel fasteners where exposed.
2.
Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, select fasteners of
type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to
other types of construction indicated.
DECORATIVE METAL
057000 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
C.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting components and for attaching decorative metal
items to other work unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193.
1.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Paint
1.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
2.
Intermediate Coats and Topcoats for Steel: Provide (2) coats.
a.
Sherwin Williams: All Surface Enamel Latex Base
b.
Color as selected by Architect and Owner
2.5
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of
joined pieces.
B.
Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and
accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and
arris.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D.
Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be
exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
E.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous
locations.
F.
Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work. Cut,
reinforce, drill, and tap as needed to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items unless
otherwise indicated.
2.6
DECORATIVE TRELLISES
A.
General: Fabricate decorative trellises to designs indicated from steel tubes and shapes of sizes
and profiles indicated.
DECORATIVE METAL
057000 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
B.
Welding: Interconnect grille members with full-length, full-penetration welds unless otherwise
indicated. Use welding method that is appropriate for metal and finish indicated and that
develops full strength of members joined. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth, flush, and
blended to match adjoining surfaces.
C.
Brackets, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, fittings, and anchors to connect
decorative window grilles to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.7
Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices to connect decorative trellises to concrete
and masonry work. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.8
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to
comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
B.
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1.
Shop prime uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces with zinc-rich primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative metal.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place
construction.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative metal. Set products accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide
DECORATIVE METAL
057000 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry, or
similar construction.
C.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated,
uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting, welding, and grinding
are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of decorative metal, restore finishes to eliminate
evidence of such corrective work.
D.
Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with
such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide
new units as required.
E.
Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.
F.
Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove
protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be
performed at same location.
1.
Retain protective coverings intact; remove coverings simultaneously from similarly
finished items to preclude nonuniform oxidation and discoloration.
G.
Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual shielded
metal arc welding and requirements for welding and for finishing welded connections in
"Fabrication, General" Article. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
H.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
3.3
INSTALLING DECORATIVE TRELLISES
A.
3.4
Fasten trellis frames to concrete and masonry walls with post-installed anchors.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap,
rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
C.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
Protect finishes of decorative metal from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by decorative metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at
time of Substantial Completion.
DECORATIVE METAL
057000 - 5
Bexley City Hall
D.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 057000
DECORATIVE METAL
057000 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Stainless steel formed counter tops
COORDINATION
A.
1.4
Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal.
1.
2.
Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details.
Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery,
finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For mechanical finishes: 3 samples based on conversation with
Architect
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepare 6-inch- (150-mm-)
square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
057500 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped
together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they
stain or bond to finished surfaces.
B.
Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction
contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METAL
A.
General: Fabricate products from sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness.
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Backing Materials: As indicated on drawings, and as recommended by decorative formed metal
manufacturer.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible
to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and
handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items with those of
adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with
edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush
surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported
sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- (12-mm-) wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) and support with concealed stiffeners.
D.
Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as
needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and
sufficient strength for indicated use.
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
057500 - 2
Bexley City Hall
1.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining
sheets in flush alignment.
E.
Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to
adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed to attach and
support other construction.
F.
Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and
accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items.
G.
Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill,
and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after
finishing is completed.
1.
2.4
Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration of
metal being joined.
STAINLESS STEEL COUNTER TOPS
A.
Form stainless steel counter tops from metal of type and thickness indicated below, with end
closures, and laminated to backing material:
1.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm).
a.
Finish: “Suede”
B.
Weld and grind smooth seams at end closures.
C.
Laminate to backing material with adhesive recommended by fabricator.
2.5
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible.
After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet
finish.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.6
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Finish: “Suede”: non-directional ground finish. Abraded with random orbit sander to match
architect provided sample.
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
057500 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
decorative formed metal.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent
construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal.
1.
B.
3.3
Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items
with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing,
or provide new units as required.
Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and
openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing
with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period.
Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 057500
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
057500 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced
architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.
Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and
hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction
before cabinet installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate and cabinet
hardware and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other
items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets.
2.
Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
D.
Plastic laminates.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface
finish.
2.
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have
been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Field Conditions" Article.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the
remainder of the construction period.
C.
Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1.
D.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 2
Bexley City Hall
1.8
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed
as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide labels or certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork
complies with requirements of grades specified.
B.
Grade: Custom.
C.
Type of Construction: Face frame.
D.
Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a.
F.
Manufacturer indicated on drawings.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
Edges: Grade HGS.
Pattern Direction: As indicated.
G.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
H.
Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws
from interior of body.
1.
I.
Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical
fasteners or glued dovetail joints.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 3
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.
WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
2.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3.
2.3
Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive
Specification)."
B.
Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-)
thick metal, and as follows:
1.
2.
Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361.
Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.
C.
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) deep,
and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.
E.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
F.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
G.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; fullextension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.
Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-platedsteel ball-bearing slides.
For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm)
wide, provide Grade 1.
For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high
and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 4
Bexley City Hall
5.
6.
7.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide,
provide Grade 1HD-200.
For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100.
For trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide,
provide Grade 1HD-200.
H.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
I.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
J.
Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
K.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
L.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B.
Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
C.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 5
Bexley City Hall
B.
3.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
C.
Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
D.
Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
E.
Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws
for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1.
F.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
2.
3.3
Use filler matching finish of items being installed.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch
(38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 064116
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 071413 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Rubberized-asphalt waterproofing membrane, unreinforced.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's written instructions for
evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and
performance properties of waterproofing.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Qualification Data: For Installer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
B.
Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
C.
Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.7
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below zero deg F (minus 18 deg C).
1.
B.
1.8
Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet flashings
that do not comply with requirements or that fail to remain watertight within specified warranty
period.
1.
2.
Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials from single source from single
manufacturer.
WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A.
Hot Fluid-Applied, Rubberized-Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane: Single component; 100
percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.3
American Hydrotech, Inc.
Barrett Company.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
Henry Company.
Soprema, Inc.
Tamko Building Products, Inc.
Tremco Incorporated.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with waterproofing.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
B.
Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M, asphaltic primer.
C.
Sealants and Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories.
D.
Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforcedasphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows:
1.
Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean,
dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C.
Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating
contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D.
Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other
voids.
3.3
JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS
A.
Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joints and cracks,
corners, and penetrations according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate. Before filling, remove dust and dirt according
to ASTM D 4258.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 3
Bexley City Hall
3.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A.
Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow it to dry.
B.
Heat and apply rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Heat rubberized asphalt in an oil- or air-jacketed melter with mechanical agitator
specifically designed for heating rubberized asphalt.
C.
Unreinforced Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to substrates and adjoining surfaces
indicated. Spread to form a uniform, unreinforced, seamless membrane, 180-mil (4.5-mm)
minimum thickness.
D.
Cover waterproofing with protection course with overlapped joints before membrane is subject
to backfilling.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071413
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Foam-plastic board insulation.
Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
Spray polyurethane foam insulation.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 075323 "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing" for insulation
specified as part of roofing construction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project
site before installation time.
Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive
strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and
450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
B.
2.2
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Company (The).
Owens Corning.
Pactiv Building Products.
Type X, 15 psi (104 kPa).
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Guardian Building Products, Inc.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
B.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C.
Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced),
Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor
barrier).
D.
Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1.
Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than
0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
2.3
SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION
A.
Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
Bexley City Hall
1.
1014-0001
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
2232 E. Main St.
BASF Corporation.
BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC.
Dow Chemical Company (The).
ERSystems, Inc.
Gaco Western Inc.
Henry Company.
NCFI; Division of Barnhardt Mfg. Co.
SWD Urethane Company.
Volatile Free, Inc.
Minimum density of 2 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq.
ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (43 K x m/W at 24 deg C).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A.
On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) below
exterior grade line.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
Bexley City Hall
3.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610
mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of
insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions.
Press units firmly against inside substrates.
1.
3.5
Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall
ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C.
Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members
according to the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not
rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),
support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of
insulation to flanges of metal studs.
Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and
seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a.
Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.
D.
Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of
studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
E.
Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required
to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
3.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed insulation[ and vapor retarders] from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 074213.53 "Metal Soffit Panels" for metal panels used in horizontal soffit
applications.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions,
joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,
and accessories; and special details.
Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not
less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied
finishes.
1.
D.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1.
Metal Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures,
and other metal panel accessories.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Qualification Data: For Installer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or
deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B.
Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C.
Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of
water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
D.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions and warranty requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
1.10
A.
Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of
soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 2
Bexley City Hall
a.
b.
2.
B.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
2.2
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A.
General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to
supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight
installation.
B.
Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, and prior approval by
Architect, provide CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Concept Series CS-660 or a
comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
AEP Span; A BlueScope Steel Company.
Alcoa Architectural Products (USA).
Architectural Building Components.
Architectural Metal Systems.
ATAS International, Inc.
Berridge Manufacturing Company.
Dimensional Metals, Inc.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 3
Bexley City Hall
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
2.
2.3
1014-0001
Fabral.
Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.
MBCI; a division of NCI Group, Inc.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
Morin - A Kingspan Group Company.
United Steel Deck, Inc.
VICWEST.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating
designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2232 E. Main St.
Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm).
Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer
Color: Centria Sundance AM 9960 XL-Medium Gray
Panel Coverage: 16 inches.
Panel Height: 7/8 inch
Welded corners
Horizontal installation (front edge of canopy)
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel
sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or
ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation
unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and
alignment of metal panel system.
B.
Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,
fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are
not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae,
parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as
adjacent metal panels.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 4
Bexley City Hall
D.
2.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied
coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements
demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
B.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
C.
Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from
movements.
D.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant
and to comply with SMACNA standards.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
a.
2.5
Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
FINISHES
A.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
C.
Steel Panels and Accessories:
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 5
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Three-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended
metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color
coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1.
2.
Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
a.
Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,
sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
2.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.
Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be
concealed by metal panels are installed.
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 6
Bexley City Hall
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.
3.
2.
3.
Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for
neat and weathertight enclosure.
Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in
predrilled holes.
Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using
sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and
elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.
Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with sealant
and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1.
F.
Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners
Watertight Installation:
1.
E.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.
Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.
Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at
location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1.
D.
1014-0001
Fasteners:
1.
C.
2232 E. Main St.
Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings,
corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide
types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that are permanently watertight.
1.
2.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true
to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 7
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
(610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or
would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within
joints).
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel
manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B.
After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and
sealant.
C.
Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213.13
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 8
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 074213.53 - METAL SOFFIT PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes metal soffit panels.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 074213.13 "Formed Metal Wall Panels" for lap-seam metal wall panels.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1.
1.4
Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions,
joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,
and accessories; and special details.
Accessories: Include details of flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not
less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color
finishes.
1.
D.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
Metal Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures,
and other metal panel accessories.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
074213.53 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.5
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or
deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B.
Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C.
Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of
water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
D.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions and warranty requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
1.10
A.
Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of
walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
074213.53 - 2
Bexley City Hall
B.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A.
General: Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting
side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using
concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
B.
Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges and a flat pan
between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CENTRIA
Architectural Systems; Profile Series IW-10A or, with Architects prior approval, a
comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
2.
3.
AEP Span; A BlueScope Steel Company.
Architectural Building Components.
ATAS International, Inc.
Berridge Manufacturing Company.
Dimensional Metals, Inc.
Englert, Inc.
Fabral.
Firestone Building Products.
Innovative Metals Company, Inc.
MBCI; a division of NCI Group, Inc.
McElroy Metal, Inc.
Merchant & Evans Inc.
Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
Ultra Seam Incorporated.
Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal wall panels.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
074213.53 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
2.2
Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm).
Exterior Finish: Metallic fluoropolymer.
Color: Match Architect's sample.
Panel Coverage: 12 inches (305 mm).
Panel Height: 1.5 inches (38 mm).
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel
sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or
ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation
unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and
alignment of metal panel system.
B.
Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match
material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
C.
Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim
with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
D.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied
coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements
demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
B.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
C.
Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from
movements.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
074213.53 - 4
Bexley City Hall
D.
1014-0001
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flatlock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant
and to comply with SMACNA standards.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
a.
2.4
2232 E. Main St.
Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal soffit panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
FINISHES
A.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
C.
Steel Panels and Accessories:
1.
Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Three-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended
metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color
coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
074213.53 - 5
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Examine framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel
support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required
by metal panel manufacturer.
Examine sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking
and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer.
a.
Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1.
3.3
Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports.
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,
sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Fasteners:
1.
C.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.
Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be
concealed by metal panels are installed.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use
galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
074213.53 - 6
Bexley City Hall
D.
3.
4.
Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, corners,
seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide
types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types
recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that are permanently watertight.
1.
2.
3.4
Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.
Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side
of metal panels.
Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use
proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of
washer.
Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in
predrilled holes.
Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1.
F.
1014-0001
Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at
location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
E.
2232 E. Main St.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling, and tool marks, and that is true
to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to achieve waterproof performance.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches
(610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or
would not be waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less
than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel
manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B.
After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and
sealant.
C.
Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
074213.53 - 7
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
END OF SECTION 074213.53
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
074213.53 - 8
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Mechanically fastened ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) roofing system.
2.
Roof insulation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work, including:
1.
Tapered insulation, including slopes.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1.
C.
1.6
Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.7
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for roofing system
identical to that used for this Project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
material from direct sunlight.
1.
C.
1.9
Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, and other
components of roofing system.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane
roofing manufacturer.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift
pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and
base flashings shall remain watertight.
1.
2.
B.
2.3
Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent
materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
EPDM ROOFING
A.
2.4
EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type II, scrim or fabric internally reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM
sheet.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b.
Firestone Building Products.
c.
GAF Materials Corporation.
d.
Johns Manville.
e.
Versico Incorporated.
2.
3.
Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
Exposed Face Color: Black.
AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with roofing.
1.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
B.
Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to
application.
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
D.
Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.
E.
Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant.
F.
Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
G.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
H.
Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick), prepunched.
I.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
J.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
molded pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced
EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and
other accessories.
2.5
ROOF INSULATION
A.
General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM roofing
manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated.
B.
Tapered Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26kg/cu. m) minimum density, square edged.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Dow Chemical Company (The).
b.
Owens Corning.
2.
Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches
(1:48) unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use
and compatibility with roofing.
B.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover
boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C.
Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 2, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch (13
mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and
roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C.
Install insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
C.
Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness
of transition.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 5
Bexley City Hall
3.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B.
Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing
roof insulation.
C.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D.
Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation
thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in
each direction.
E.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does
not restrict flow of water.
F.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch
(6 mm) with insulation.
1.
Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
G.
Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
1.
Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
H.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in
each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together.
3.5
MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Mechanically fasten roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before
installing.
1.
For in-splice attachment, install roofing with long dimension perpendicular to steel roof
deck flutes.
B.
Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C.
Mechanically fasten or adhere e roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of
roofing.
D.
Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
E.
Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly
roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing
terminations.
F.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.
G.
Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in
place with clamping ring.
H.
Through-Membrane Attachment: Secure roofing using fastening plates or metal battens, and
mechanically fasten roofing to roof deck. Cover battens and fasteners with a continuous cover
strip.
3.6
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D.
Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of
sheet flashing terminations.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.7
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
END OF SECTION 075323
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 7
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Copings.
Reglets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to
other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.
Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including
direction of expansion and contraction.
Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other
attachments.
Include details of special conditions.
C.
Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
1.4
Include Samples of each type of roof specialty to verify finish and color selection, in
manufacturer's standard sizes.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.5
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,
or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B.
Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field
measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof
deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof
specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1.
Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally
induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,
failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that
resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
COPINGS
A.
Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths
not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and
concealed splice plates with finish matching coping caps.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Coping Caps: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, nominal 0.034inch (0.86-mm) thickness.
a.
b.
c.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3.
Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded.
4.
5.
Special Fabrications: Integrated gutter system (see architectural drawings).
Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on or face leg hooked to continuous cleat with
back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.
a.
b.
2.3
Architectural Products Company.
ATAS International, Inc.
Castle Metal Products.
Centria.
Cheney Flashing Company.
Hickman Company, W. P.
Merchant & Evans Inc.
Metal-Era, Inc.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
Perimeter Systems; a division of SAF.
Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches (300
mm) wide, with integral cleats.
Face-Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.
REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Castle Metal Products.
Centria.
Cheney Flashing Company.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
Hickman Company, W. P.
Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 3
Bexley City Hall
8.
9.
B.
Metal-Era, Inc.
Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch (0.71-mm) thickness.
Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded.
Masonry Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with offset top flange for embedment in
masonry mortar joint.
Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Three-coat metallic fluoropolymer.
1.
2.4
1014-0001
Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and
counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:
1.
2.
3.
C.
2232 E. Main St.
Color: Match Architect's sample (Centria Sundance AM 9960 XL Medium Gray) .
MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet
performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color
of sheet metal.
Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip
zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
B.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
C.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.6
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D.
Coil-Coated Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finishes:
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 4
Bexley City Hall
1.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M and coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
a.
Three-Coat Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish with
suspended metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by
weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
b.
Concealed Surface Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard acrylic
or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.
C.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and
securely anchored.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning
and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.
1.
2.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet (3.6 m) with no joints within 18 inches
(450 mm) of corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21
deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
C.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
D.
Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in
joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
3.3
COPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B.
Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet
performance requirements.
1.
2.
3.4
Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates
anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance
requirements.
Interlock face-leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at. Anchor back
leg of coping with screw fasteners and elastomeric washers at manufacturer's required
spacing that meets performance requirements.
ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed
fasteners.
B.
Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to
meet performance requirements.
3.5
ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof-edge drainage system.
B.
Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly
anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart. Attach ends with
rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.
C.
Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch (25 mm) away from
walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.
1.
Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
3.6
REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base
flashings.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
B.
Embedded Reglets: See Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installation of reglets.
C.
Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that
counterflashings overlap 4 inches (100 mm) over top edge of base flashings. Lap
counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with butyl sealant. Fit
counterflashings tightly to base flashings.
3.7
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On
completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal
filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition
during construction.
D.
Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
077100 - 7
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes hollow-metal work.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
2.
Section 081416 “Flush Wood Doors” for flush wood doors used with hollow metal
frames
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.
Shop Drawings or Manufacturer’s Published Details: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Elevations of each door type.
Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 1
Bexley City Hall
9.
2232 E. Main St.
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
E.
1.6
1014-0001
For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5
inches (75 by 127 mm).
Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum
4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each
stacked door to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following]
[provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Amweld International, LLC.
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Custom Metal Products.
Daybar.
LaForce, Inc.
MPI Group, LLC (The).
North American Door Corp.
Republic Doors and Frames.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Steward Steel; Door Division.
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B.
Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. All interior hollow metal Frames.
1.
Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
2.
Frames:
a.
b.
3.
2.3
Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).
Construction: Knocked down.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B.
Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. Rear service door D-116A.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Frames:
a.
b.
4.
2.4
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.)
Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with
minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
Edge Construction:Model 1, Full Flush.
Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's
discretion.
Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm),
with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
Construction: Face welded.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 3
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1014-0001
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
inch (4.5 mm) thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch(9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0
mm), and as follows:
1.
2.
2.5
2232 E. Main St.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing
not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
H.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly
identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel
vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical
webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more
than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber
insulation.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at
manufacturer's discretion.
Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face
sheets.
Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of
weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs
by butt welding.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at
bottoms of jambs.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match
coursing, and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 5
Bexley City Hall
b.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
c.
d.
6.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm)
from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm)
o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers
as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
D.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1.
2.
F.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with hairline joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation
types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
5.
Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 7
Bexley City Hall
6.
7.
b.
c.
d.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32
inch (0.8 mm).
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or
minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch (19.1 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.8 mm)] plus or minus 1/32
inch (0.8 mm).
Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or
minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.4
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
D.
1014-0001
In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
C.
2232 E. Main St.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each
corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 8
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 9
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Factory machining for hardware.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1.
Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2.
Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3.
Undercuts.
4.
Requirements for veneer matching.
5.
Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
1.4
Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200
by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish,
provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in
finished Work.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
B.
Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.5
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C.
Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder
of construction period.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity
between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
2.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch
(1067-by-2134-mm) section.
b.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
(0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and
WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with
requirements of grades specified.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
B.
Regional Materials: Flush wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of
Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
C.
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1.
Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a.
b.
2.3
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).
Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).
VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors: Type “A” on drawings
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.4
Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.
Species: White oak.
Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A.
Core: Structural composite lumber.
Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive
planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1.
2.5
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1.
B.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted ontop and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
Factory finish doors.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 3
Bexley City Hall
C.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grade: Premium.
Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 5,
conversion varnish System 9, UV curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane System
10, UV curable, water based or System 11, catalyzed polyurethane.
Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill
the wood pores.
Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer. Machine doors for
hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1.
D.
3.3
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4
inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge
edges.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 4
Bexley City Hall
B.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Exterior and interior storefront framing.
Storefront framing for punched openings.
Interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
Section 084126 "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts" for systems without aluminum
support framing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations,
sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminumframed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Joinery, including concealed welds.
Anchorage.
Expansion provisions.
Glazing.
Flashing and drainage.
Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 1
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
D.
Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Qualification Data: For Installer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance
manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1.
1.7
Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed
entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
Failure of operating components.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this
Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
1.
2.
Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting
structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term
creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Failure also includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Structural Loads:
1.
C.
2.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to
glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1
mm), whichever is less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm),
whichever is smaller.
Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Wind Loads.
Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1.
D.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Glass breakage.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Failure of operating units.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1.
Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a.
2.
Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-airpressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
Entrance Doors:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 3
Bexley City Hall
a.
F.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. (2.54 L/s per sq. m) at a
static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1.
No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive windload design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
G.
Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
H.
Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor
of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.55 W/sq. m x K) as determined according
to NFRC 100.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified
condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 as determined according to NFRC 500.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1.
2.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
AAMA 501.5.
a.
b.
c.
2.2
High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metalsurface temperature of [180 deg F (82 deg C)] <Insert temperature>.
Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: [0 deg F (minus 18 deg C)] <Insert
temperature>.
Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: [75 deg F (24 deg C)] <Insert temperature>.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer North
America; an Alcoa company products as indicated in articles below, or comparable product by
one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
EFCO Corporation.
Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.
Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.
TRACO.
Tubelite Inc.
United States Aluminum.
YKK AP America Inc.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 4
Bexley City Hall
B.
2.3
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system,
including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
FRAMING
A.
Product:
1.
Exterior locations: Kawneer, TriFab VG 451
2.
Interior locations: Kawneer, TriFab VG 451T
B.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Construction:
a.
Exterior locations: Thermally improved.
b.
Interior locations: Thermally non-broken
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: Front.
Finish: Clear anodic finish.
Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
C.
Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
D.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A.
Product: Kawneer, 350 Heavy Wall Entrance Door
B.
Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1.
Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-)
thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners
with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
2.
3.
Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 5
Bexley City Hall
a.
2.5
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A.
Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100
"Door Hardware."
B.
General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and
frame schedule for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
named manufacturers' products.
Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
Opening-Force Requirements:
a.
b.
C.
Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than
30 lbf (133 N)to set the door in motion.
Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware
Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:
1.
Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.
D.
Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
E.
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
F.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1.
2.
G.
2.6
Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287,
molded PVC.
Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with
nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners
on mounting strip.
GLAZING
A.
Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2.7
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
B.
nonstaining,
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that
accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with
adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
C.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C.
Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 7
Bexley City Hall
2.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
F.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
G.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.9
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not
limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 8
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or by installing nonconductive spacers.
Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
F.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
2.
3.4
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware
according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed
fasteners to greatest extent possible.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m).
Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m).
Alignment:
a.
b.
c.
4.
3.5
Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to
1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch
(12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm)
wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch
(12.7 mm) over total length.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminumframed entrances and storefronts.
1.
Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by
Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 9
Bexley City Hall
a.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect.
C.
Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Entrance Door Hardware:
1.
2.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months'
full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include
quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door
hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same
as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 10
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 084126 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Interior sliding all-glass doors.
All-glass sidelights.
Full height all-glass partitions
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for overhead-steel support for all-glass systems.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: For all-glass entrances.
1.
2.
C.
Include plans, elevations, and sections.
Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish indicated, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for all-glass system.
Metal Finishes: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of rail fittings, accessory fittings, and
other items.
Glass: 6 inches (150 mm) square, showing exposed-edge finish.
Door Hardware: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final
entrance door hardware schedule with doors sidelights, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
084126 - 1
Bexley City Hall
E.
1.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Delegated-Design Submittal: For all-glass systems indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For all-glass systems to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1.
1.7
Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of all-glass systems
that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Failure of operating components.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
084126 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design all-glass entrances.
B.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of all-glass entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
C.
Seismic Performance: All-glass entrances shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
Doralco Architectural Metals, or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
2.3
Alpha Door & Rail, Inc.
Virginia Glass Products Corporation.
METAL COMPONENTS
A.
Fitting Configuration:
1.
2.
3.
Manual-Swinging, All-Glass Entrance Doors: Patch fitting at top and continuous rail
fitting at bottom.
Manual-Sliding, All-Glass Entrance Doors Sidelights: Continuous rail fitting at top and
bottom with top rail hidden in soffit above.
All-Glass Storefronts: Recessed glazing channel at top and continuous rail fitting at
bottom.
A.
Patch Fittings: Aluminum.
B.
Rail Fittings:
1.
2.
Material: Aluminum.
Height:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Top Rail: 3-1/2 inches (89 mm).
Bottom Rail: 3-1/2 inches (89 mm).
Profile: Square.
End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for rail fittings.
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
084126 - 3
Bexley City Hall
C.
2232 E. Main St.
Accessory Fittings: Match patch and rail-fitting metal and finish for the following:
1.
2.
3.
Overhead doorstop.
Center-housing lock.
Glass-support-fin brackets.
D.
Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.
E.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), with strength and durability characteristics
of not less than Alloy 6063-T5.
a.
2.4
1014-0001
Color: Clear Anodized.
GLASS
A.
Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
(transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact
strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1.
Class 1: Clear monolithic.
a.
2.
3.
2.5
Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished.
Butt Edges: Flat ground.
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended
by manufacturer for all-glass entrance systems indicated. For exposed parts, match metal and
finish of patch fittings and rail fittings.
B.
Concealed Floor Closers and Top Pivots: Center hung; BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; including
cases, bottom arms, top walking beam pivots, plates, and accessories required for complete
installation.
1.
Swing: Single acting.
a.
2.
3.
Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle if any, or at angle selected.
Hold Open: Automatic, at angle selected.
Opening-Force Requirements:
a.
b.
Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than
30 lbf (133 N)to set the door in motion.
Accessible Interior Swinging and Sliding Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to
fully open door.
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
084126 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
A.
Push-Pull Set: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
B.
Active-Leaf Locksets: Bottom-fitting or bottom-rail deadbolt.
1.
C.
1014-0001
Deadbolt operated by key outside and thumb turn inside.
Inactive-Leaf Locksets: Bottom-fitting or bottom-rail deadbolt.
1.
Deadbolt operated by key outside and thumb turn inside.
D.
Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
E.
Threshold: Not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
F.
Manual-Sliding Entrance Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard for sliding action indicated
and with twin rollers.
1.
2.6
Type: Bottom-rolling door.
BUTT-GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
2.7
Single-Component, Nonsag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses NT, G, and A.
FABRICATION
A.
Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before
tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering.
1.
B.
Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when
glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.
Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent
possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
084126 - 5
Bexley City Hall
3.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INSTALLATION
A.
Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.
C.
Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D.
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Set, seal, and grout floor track inserts as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.
F.
Install butt-joint sealants according to manufacturer's instructions and as specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust all-glass entrance doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at
contact points.
1.
B.
For all-glass entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to
provide a three-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open
position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch measured to the leading door edge.
Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces.
END OF SECTION 084226
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
084126 - 6
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for:
a. Swinging doors.
2. Field verification, preparation and modification of existing doors and frames to receive
new door hardware.
B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this
section for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Windows
Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets
Signage
Toilet accessories
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section.
2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold
installation specified in this section.
3. Division 09 sections for touchup finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by
this section.
4. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring.
5. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control
system.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Fire/Life Safety
1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
a.
b.
c.
d.
NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-1
6/12/14
2. State Fire Safety Code.
B. UL - Underwriters Laboratories
1.
2.
3.
4.
UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies
UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies
UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
UL 305 - Panic Hardware
C. Accessibility
1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act.
2. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
D. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute
1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule
2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware
3. Key Systems and Nomenclature
E. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and
Specialties
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements.
2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from
Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally
affect the Work.
3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and
frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article,
herein.
B. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item
of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and
other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of
electrified door hardware, indicating:
a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including:
1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security
systems.
2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware.
3) Point-to-point wiring.
4) Risers.
3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample
installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full
description for coordination with schedule.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-2
6/12/14
a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable
to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within
limitations of key coordination requirements.
4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as
illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door
and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each
door or opening, include:
a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set
number.
b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each
opening.
c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
d. Name and manufacturer of each item.
e. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings.
g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
h. Mounting locations for hardware.
i. Door and frame sizes and materials.
j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product.
k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits,
electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches,
magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components).
Operational description should include how door will operate on egress, ingress, and
fire and smoke alarm connection.
1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with
submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate
submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other
work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction
schedule.
5. Key Schedule:
a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as
explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.
b. Use ANSI A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for
nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.
c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance
with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each
key to unique door designations.
d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross
keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.
e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic
illustrating system usage and expansion.
1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by
means as directed by Owner.
f.
Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final
keying instructions for locks.
6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors,
frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation.
C. Informational Submittals:
1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-3
6/12/14
2. Product Certificates for electrified door hardware, signed by manufacturer:
a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated
doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.
3. Certificates of Compliance:
a. Certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if
requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction.
b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor,
attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in “QUALITY
ASSURANCE” article, herein.
c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance,
signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination
conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.
4. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by qualified
testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.
5. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operations and Maintenance Data : Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:
a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and
replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.
b. Catalog pages for each product.
c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.
d. Parts list for each product.
e. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed.
f. Final keying schedule
g. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature
h. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage
and 110 volts.
i. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to
identify project.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as
specified herein.
1. Where specific manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by “No Substitute,”
including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note:
Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project
suitability.)
a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product category,
requirements for “No Substitute” govern product selection.
2. Where products indicate “acceptable substitute” or “acceptable manufacturer”, provide
product from specified manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements
and “Single Source Responsibility” requirements stated herein.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-4
6/12/14
B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with
record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,
type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable
times during the Work for consultation.
1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
4. Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of electronic security hardware with
Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect
and other related subcontractors.
a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that
all components are working properly.
C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade
hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar
in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.
D. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors.
Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation.
Capable of producing wiring diagrams.
Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical
engineers.
E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
F. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with
NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwriters Laboratories,
Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing
at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with
requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.
G. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door
assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies
tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at
tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-5
6/12/14
H. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I.
Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release latch.
Locks do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
J.
Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of wrist
and that operate with force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
2. Maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.
b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.
c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Bevel raised thresholds with slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from open position of 70 degrees, door will take
at least 3 seconds to move to 3 inches (75 mm) from latch, measured to leading edge of
door.
K. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, Owner's security consultant, and
Supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant.
2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door
hardware keying system including:
a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required,
and plans for future expansion.
b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
c. Requirements for key control system.
d. Requirements for access control.
e. Address for delivery of keys.
L. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware.
4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.
5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
M. Coordination Conferences:
1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold
meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of
door hardware.
a. Attendees: Door hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor.
b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when meeting was
held and who was in attendance.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-6
6/12/14
2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware,
schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors
and frames, and other related suppliers.
a. Attendees: electrified door hardware supplier, doors and frames supplier, electrified
door hardware installer, electrical subcontractor, Owner, Owner’s security consultant,
Architect and Contractor.
b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when coordination
conference was held and who was in attendance.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware
schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each
item or package.
1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.
C. Project Conditions:
1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and
installation periods.
2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet installed.
Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be
delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
D. Protection and Damage:
1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping.
2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or
repair products damaged during Work.
3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical
agent.
E. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction.
Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements
are specified in Division 03.
B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made
for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's
security consultant.
D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door
hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-7
6/12/14
E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify
existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions
and to provide proper door operation.
F. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.
a. Closers:
1) Mechanical: 30 years.
b. Exit Devices:
1) Mechanical: 3 years.
2) Electrified: 1 year.
c.
Locksets:
1) Mechanical: 10 years.
2) Electrified: 1 year.
2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation,
improper use or abuse.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools:
1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of
hardware, including changing of cylinders.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with QUALITY
ASSURANCE article, herein.
B. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated as “Acceptable Manufacturer” is
contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all
requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.
C. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish
each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-8
6/12/14
D. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring
hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject
to Architect's approval.
2.2 EXISTING MATERIALS
A. Where existing door hardware is indicated to be removed and reinstalled:
1. Carefully remove door hardware and components.
2. Clean, protect and store existing door hardware in accordance with storage and handling
requirements specified herein.
3. Reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Fasteners
1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared
for machine screw installation.
2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under
any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work,
to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted
finish.
3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except
when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not
use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other
work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door
specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.
4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.
B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen,
reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting
new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations.
1. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas.
2. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as
required to maintain fire-rating.
C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for
hardware installation.
1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.
D. Cable and Connectors: Hardwired Electronic Access Control Lockset and Exit Device Trim:
1. Data: 24AWG, 4 conductor shielded, Belden 9843, 9841 or comparable.
2. DC Power: 18 AWG, 2 conductor, Belden 8760 or comparable.
3. Provide type of data and DC power cabling required by access control device
manufacturer for this installation.
4. Where scheduled in the hardware sets, provide each item of electrified hardware and
wire harnesses with sufficient number and wire gauge with standardized Molex plug
connectors to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex
connectors that plug directly into connectors from harnesses, electric locking and power
transfer devices. Provide through-door wire harness for each electrified locking device
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-9
6/12/14
installed in a door and wire harness for each electrified hinge, electrified continuous
hinge, electrified pivot, and electric power transfer for connection to power supplies.
2.4 HINGES
A. Provide five-knuckle, ball bearing hinges.
1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, Stanley FBB Series.
B. Requirements:
1. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high
b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high
2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
3. 2 inches or thicker doors:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
4. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and
one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.
5. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges
of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.
6. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Steel Hinges: Steel pins
Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins
Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins
Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins
Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins
7. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches
(127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door,
frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.
8. Doors 36 inches (914 mm) wide or less furnish hinges 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high; doors
greater than 36 inches (914 mm) wide furnish hinges 5 inches (127 mm) high, heavy
weight or standard weight as specified.
9. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with
sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.
Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking
component.
10. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified, unless specified in hollow metal
frame specification.
11. Provide spring hinges where specified. Provide two spring hinges and one bearing hinge
per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height. Provide one additional
bearing hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-10
6/12/14
2.5 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Aluminum Geared
1. Manufacturers:
a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hager, Markar.
2. Requirements:
a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI A156.25, Grade 1.
b. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets,
fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum, with 0.25-inch (6 mm) diameter Teflon coated
stainless steel hinge pin.
c. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating
operation.
d. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and
successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles.
e. On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified
for use on rated doors by testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
f. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option scheduled in the
hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate
electric function of specified hardware.
g. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer.
h. Provide hinges with symmetrical hole pattern.
2.6 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER
A. Manufacturers:
a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Von Duprin
b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Falcon, ABH
B. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide
with number and gage of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified
hardware.
C. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer’s template and UL requirements, unless
interference with operation of door or other hardware items.
2.7 MORTISE LOCKS
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage L9000 series
2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Sargent 8200 series
B. Requirements:
1. Provide mortise locks certified as ANSI A156.13, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security,
and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc
dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Provide lock case that is multi-function and
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-11
6/12/14
2.
3.
4.
5.
field reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article,
herein.
Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm)
throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch
(25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.
Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.
Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide electrified locksets
with micro switch (RX) option that monitors retractor crank, and is actuated when rotation
of inside or outside lever rotates retractor hub. Provide normally closed contacts or
normally open contacts as required by security system.
Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with
wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece
spindles.
a. Lever Design: Schlage 03.
2.8 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS – GRADE 1
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage ND Series
2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Sargent 10-Line.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Cylinders:
Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
2. Provide locksets able to withstand 1500 inch pounds of torque applied to locked outside
lever without gaining access per ANSI A156.2 Abusive Locked Lever Torque Test and
cycle tested to 3 million cycles per ANSI A156.2 Cycle Test.
3. Provide levers with vandal resistant technology for use at heavy traffic or abusive
applications. Levers feature internal lock components that prevent damage caused by
excessive force from persons kicking, hitting or standing on lever to gain access.
4. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with
1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.
5. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws.
6. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted
under roses to prevent lever sag.
7. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.
8. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets.
9. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides.
a. Lever Design: Schlage Tubular (TLR)
2.9 EXIT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 99/33 series
2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Sargent 80 series, Precision Apex series
B. Requirements:
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-12
6/12/14
1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit
or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
2. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or
aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware.
3. Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width. Match exit device finish, stainless
steel for US26, US26D, US28, US32, and US32D finishes; and for all other finishes,
provide compatible finish to exit device. Provide compression springs in devices, latches,
and outside trims or controls; tension springs also acceptable.
4. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm
kits and/or other electrified requirements.
5. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes.
6. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at height
recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and
approved by Architect.
7. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind
devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits.
8. Provide cylinder dogging at non-fire-rated exit devices, unless specified less dogging.
9. Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled
as keyed removable mullion that is removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is selflocking when re-installed.
10. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty
lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will
travel to 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and
which can easily be re-set.
a. Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets.
11. Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings.
12. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly
corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.
13. Provide electrified options as scheduled.
2.10 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage Electronics or Von Duprin PS900 series
2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Precision ELR series, Sargent 3500 series,
B. Requirements:
1. Provide power supplies, recommended and approved by manufacturer of electrified
locking component, for operation of electrified locks, electrified exit devices, magnetic
locks, electric strikes, and other components requiring power supply.
2. Provide appropriate quantity of power supplies necessary for proper operation of
electrified locking components as recommended by manufacturer of electrified locking
components with consideration for each electrified component using power supply,
location of power supply, and approved wiring diagrams. Locate power supplies as
directed by Architect.
3. Provide regulated and filtered 24 VDC power supply , and UL class 2 listed.
4. Options:
a. Provide power supply, where specified, with internal capability of charging sealed
backup batteries 24 VDC, in addition to operating DC load.
b. Provide sealed batteries for battery back-up at each power supply where specified.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-13
6/12/14
c.
Provide keyed power supply cabinet.
5. Provide power supply in an enclosure, complete, and requiring 120VAC to fused input.
6. Provide power supply with emergency release terminals, where specified, that allow
release of all devices upon activation of fire alarm system complete with fire alarm input
for initiating “no delay” exiting mode.
2.11 CYLINDERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Sargent
B. Requirements: Provide cylinders/cores complying with the following requirements.
1. Furnished by same manufacturer as locks.
2. Cylinders/cores compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12, Grade 1;
permanent cylinders; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as
indicated.
C. Full-sized cylinders in the below-listed configuration(s), distributed throughout the Project as
indicated.
1. Conventional: cylinder with full size interchangeable core with patented, restricted
keyway.
D. Patent Protection: Cylinders/cores requiring use of restricted, patented keys, patentprotected.
E. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication
“Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Blind code marks shall not include
actual key cuts.
F. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner.
G. Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of
cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner.
1. Forward cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by
Owner.
H. Replaceable Construction Cores.
1. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in
accordance with the following requirements.
I.
12 construction change (day) keys.
1. General Contractor will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-14
6/12/14
2.12 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28,
incorporating decisions made at keying conference.
B. Keying Requirements – General
1. Permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key
system.
C. Keying system as directed by the Owner.
D. Keys
1. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .092-inch (2.3mm)
2. Identification:
E. Coordinate with cylinder/core and key identification requirements above.
F. Stamp keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as established by the
manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with
the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection.
G. Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of keys
involved at no additional cost to Owner.
1. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.
a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core.
b. Permanent Control Keys: 3.
c. Master Keys: 6.
2.13 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Key Control System Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Lund
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Telkee
B. Requirements:
1. Provide key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips,
receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and
standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for
150% of number of locks required for Project.
a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and place keys on
markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule.
b. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
2.14 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Manufacturers and Products:
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-15
6/12/14
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4010/4110 series
2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Sargent 281/281P10 series factory assembled
(without PRV).
B. Requirements:
1. Provide door closers certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA
certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date
of manufacture code.
2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high strength cast
iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.
3. Cylinder Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter, with 11/16 inch (17 mm) diameter double
heat-treated pinion journal.
4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal
closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.
5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and provideing
reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.
6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves with separate adjustment for
latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.
7. Provide closers with a solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty
forged forearms for parallel arm closers.
8. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.
9. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder coating
finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in
ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor (SRI).
10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as
required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer
mounting.
2.15 DOOR TRIM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hager, Rockwood.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch
(1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches
(102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.
2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push
bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required,
mount back to back with pull.
3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where
required, mount back to back with push bar.
4. Provide flush pulls as specified. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model.
5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required,
mount back to back with push bar.
6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1
mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use
of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.
7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-16
6/12/14
2.16 PROTECTION PLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hager, Rockwood.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick as
scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates.
2. Sizes of plates:
a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on
single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single
doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on
single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
2.17 ROBE HOOKS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Ives, Hager, Rockwood.
B. Provide robe hooks as specified.
2.18 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hager, Rockwood.
B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:
1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are
used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.
2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop.
2.19 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: National Guard Products
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Pemko, Zero.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, astragals) and
gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural
details. Match finish of other items.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-17
6/12/14
2. Size of thresholds::
a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width
b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door
width
3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient
or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.
2.20 SILENCERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hager, Rockwood.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames.
2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for
each pair frame.
3. Omit where gasketing is specified.
2.21 FINSHES
A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 (US28)
Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Door Closers: (MTLPC)
Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Weather-stripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum
Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly
construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Existing Door and Frame Compatibility: Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new
hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is
compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions.
C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-18
6/12/14
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required:
1. Remove existing hardware being replaced, tag, and store according to contract
documents.
2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed.
3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible.
4. Prepare hardware locations in accordance with:
a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and
frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for
Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware
preparation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.
C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate.
Protect all installed hardware during painting.
D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or
excessive clearance.
G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer
than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every
30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent
means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.
1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section.
I.
Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for:
1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-19
6/12/14
2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware.
3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system.
4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as
directed by Architect.
5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number.
J.
Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
K. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair
side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and
other public spaces unless approved by Architect.
L. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible
ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect.
M. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
N. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present
tripping hazard.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage qualified independent Architectural Hardware
Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
1. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report
whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether
door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six (6) months after date of Substantial Completion,
Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door
hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors,
door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-20
6/12/14
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware
sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features,
options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.
B. Hardware Sets:
SPEXTRA: 111313
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-100A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
1 EA
CONT. HINGE
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1 EA
RIM HOUSING
2 EA
FSIC CONST. CORE
2 EA
FSIC CORE
1 EA
90 DEG OFFSET PULL
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
MOUNTING PLATE
1 EA
CUSH SHOE SUPPORT
1 EA
BLADE STOP SPACER
1 EA
THRESHOLD
1 EA
1
EA
CATALOG NUMBER
112HD
33A-NL-OP-388
20-059 XQ11-948
20-079
23-030-ICX
23-030
8190 18" O
4111 SCUSH SRI MC TBSRT
4110-18
4110-30
4110-61
896S MS/LA
WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME
MANUFACTURER
DOOR BOTTOM BY DOOR/FRAME
MANUFACTURER
FINISH
628
626
626
626
CATALOG NUMBER
112HD
9190-18"-NO
4111 SHCUSH SRI MC TBSRT
4110-18
4110-30
4110-61
FINISH
628
630
MTLPC
689
689
689
626
630
MTLPC
689
689
689
AL
MFR
IVE
VON
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
IVE
LCN
LCN
LCN
LCN
NGP
B/O
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-100AB
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
1 EA
CONT. HINGE
1 SET
PUSH/PULL BAR
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
MOUNTING PLATE
1 EA
CUSH SHOE SUPPORT
1 EA
BLADE STOP SPACER
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
MFR
IVE
IVE
LCN
LCN
LCN
LCN
087100-21
6/12/14
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-106B
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
4 EA
HW HINGE
1 EA
PRIVACY W/DB & IND
1
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
EA
FSIC CORE
KICK PLATE
WALL STOP
COAT AND HAT HOOK
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
L9496T OCCUPIED/VACANT 03C L583363
23-030
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS407CCV
582
FINISH
652
626
MFR
IVE
SCH
626
630
630
626
SCH
IVE
IVE
IVE
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
CI-99-L-996-03
20-059 XQ11-948
20-079
23-030-ICX
23-030
4111 EDA MC TBSRT
WS407CCV
SR64
FINISH
652
626
626
626
626
MTLPC
630
GRY
MFR
IVE
VON
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5
8200 4" X 16"
8302 10" 4" X 16"
4011T BUMP MC TBSRT
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
SR64
FINISH
652
630
630
MTLPC
630
GRY
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
LCN
IVE
IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-101B
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
3 EA
HW HINGE
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1 EA
RIM HOUSING
2 EA
FSIC CONST. CORE
2 EA
FSIC CORE
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
WALL STOP
3 EA
SILENCER
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-102A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
4 EA
HW HINGE
1 EA
PUSH PLATE
1 EA
PULL PLATE
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
3 EA
SILENCER
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-22
6/12/14
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-102AA
D-113A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
4 EA
HW HINGE
1 EA
VANDL CLASSROOM
LOCK
1 EA
FSIC CORE
1 EA
KICK PLATE
3 EA
SILENCER
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 5 X 4.5
ND94TD TLR
FINISH
652
626
MFR
IVE
SCH
23-030
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
SR64
626
630
GRY
SCH
IVE
IVE
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 5 X 4.5
L9496T OCCUPIED/VACANT 03C L583363
23-030
4011 MC TBSRT
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
FS495
(INSTALL AT TOP EDGE OF DOOR)
582
SR64
FINISH
652
626
MFR
IVE
SCH
626
MTLPC
630
626
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
626
GRY
IVE
IVE
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 5 X 4.5
8200 4" X 16"
8302 10" 4" X 16"
4011 MC TBSRT
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
8400 4" X 1" LDW B4E
FINISH
652
630
630
MTLPC
630
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
LCN
IVE
IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-103A
D-103AA
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
4 EA
HW HINGE
1 EA
PRIVACY W/DB & IND
1
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
EA
FSIC CORE
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
WALL STOP/HOLDER
1
3
EA
EA
COAT AND HAT HOOK
SILENCER
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 08
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-104A
D-105A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
4 EA
HW HINGE
1 EA
PUSH PLATE
1 EA
PULL PLATE
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
1 EA
MOP PLATE
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-23
6/12/14
1
EA
WALL STOP/HOLDER
3
EA
SILENCER
FS495
(INSTALL AT TOP EDGE OF DOOR)
SR64
626
IVE
GRY
IVE
CATALOG NUMBER
ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUF
FINISH
MFR
B/O
CATALOG NUMBER
112HD
33A-NL-OP-388
20-059 XQ11-948
20-079
23-030-ICX
23-030
4111 SHCUSH SRI MC TBSRT
4110-18
4110-30
4110-61
16A
WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME
MANUFACTURER
DOOR BOTTOM BY DOOR/FRAME
MANUFACTURER
FINISH
628
626
626
626
MFR
IVE
VON
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
LCN
LCN
LCN
LCN
NGP
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 5 X 4.5
ND94TD TLR
FINISH
652
626
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-106A
D-107A
D-108A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
1 EA
NOTE
D-110A
D-111A
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-106C
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
1 EA
CONT. HINGE
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1 EA
RIM HOUSING
2 EA
FSIC CONST. CORE
2 EA
FSIC CORE
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
MOUNTING PLATE
1 EA
CUSH SHOE SUPPORT
1 EA
BLADE STOP SPACER
1 EA
DRIP CAP
1 EA
1
EA
626
MTLPC
689
689
689
CL
B/O
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-112A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
4 EA
HW HINGE
1 EA
VANDL CLASSROOM
LOCK
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
MFR
IVE
SCH
087100-24
6/12/14
1
1
1
3
EA
EA
EA
EA
FSIC CORE
KICK PLATE
WALL STOP
SILENCER
23-030
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS407CCV
SR64
626
630
630
GRY
SCH
IVE
IVE
IVE
CATALOG NUMBER
112HD EPT
EPT10 CON
EL-33A-NL-OP-388
FINISH
628
689
626
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
20-079
23-030-ICX
23-030
8190 18" O
4111 SCUSH SRI MC TBSRT
4110-18
4110-30
4110-61
16A
896S MS/LA
PS914 900-4R
RISER DIAGRAM 12
CARD READER BY OTHERS
WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME
MANUFACTURER
DOOR BOTTOM BY DOOR/FRAME
MANUFACTURER
CON-192P
(FROM POWER TRANSFER TO POWER
SUPPLY)
CON-12P
FROM POWER SUPPLY
CON-50
(FROM EXIT DEVICE TO POWER
TRANSFER)
626
SCH
SCH
SCH
IVE
LCN
LCN
LCN
LCN
NGP
NGP
VON
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-109A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
1 EA
CONT. HINGE
1 EA
POWER TRANSFER
1 EA
ELEC PANIC
HARDWARE
1 EA
RIM HOUSING
1 EA
FSIC CONST. CORE
1 EA
FSIC CORE
1 EA
90 DEG OFFSET PULL
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
MOUNTING PLATE
1 EA
CUSH SHOE SUPPORT
1 EA
BLADE STOP SPACER
1 EA
DRIP CAP
1 EA
THRESHOLD
1 EA
POWER SUPPLY
1
RISER
1
1 EA
1
EA
1
EA
WIRE HARNESS
1
EA
WIRE HARNESS
1
EA
WIRE HARNESS
626
630
MTLPC
689
689
689
CL
AL
LGR
B/O
SCH
VON
VON
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
DOOR TO BE LOCKED AT ALL TIMES. PRESENTING AN AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL TO READER
WILL RELEASE LEVER ON SECURE SIDE OF DOOR MOMENTARILY AND ALLOW ENTRY. WHEN
DOOR RETURNS TO THE CLOSED POSITION, LEVER ON SECURE SIDE SHALL RE-LOCK AND
DOOR WILL BE SECURED.
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-25
6/12/14
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 13
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D-100B
D-100C
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
3 EA
HW HINGE
1 EA
POWER TRANSFER
1 EA
VANDL EU
STOREROOM
1 EA
INTERFACE BOX
1 EA
FSIC CORE
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
1 EA
WALL STOP
3 EA
SILENCER
1 EA
POWER SUPPLY
1
RISER
1
1 EA
WIRE HARNESS
1
EA
WIRE HARNESS
1
EA
WIRE HARNESS
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5
EPT10 CON
ND96TDEU TLR CON
FINISH
652
689
626
MFR
IVE
VON
SCH
JB7
23-030
4011 MC TBSRT
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS407CCV
SR64
PS902 900-2RS
RISER DIAGRAM 13
CARD READER BY OTHERS
CON-192P
(FROM LOCKSET TO POWER
TRANSFER)
CON-12P
(FROM POWER SUPPLY)
CON-192P
(FROM POWER TRANSFER TO POWER
SUPPLY)
GRAY
626
MTLPC
630
630
GRY
LGR
VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCE
SCH
VON
VON
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
DOOR TO BE LOCKED AT ALL TIMES. PRESENTING AN AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL TO READER
WILL RELEASE LEVER ON SECURE SIDE OF DOOR MOMENTARILY AND ALLOW ENTRY. WHEN
DOOR RETURNS TO THE CLOSED POSITION, LEVER ON SECURE SIDE SHALL RE-LOCK AND
DOOR WILL BE SECURED.
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 14
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
D116A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
1 EA
CONT. HINGE
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1 EA
RIM HOUSING
2 EA
FSIC CONST. CORE
2 EA
FSIC CORE
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA
KICK PLATE
1 SET
SEALS
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
CATALOG NUMBER
112HD
CI-99-L-996-03
20-059 XQ11-948
20-079
23-030-ICX
23-030
4111 SHCUSH SRI MC ST-1586TBSRT
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
700SA
FINISH
628
626
626
626
626
MTLPC
630
CL
MFR
IVE
VON
SCH
SCH
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
NGP
087100-26
6/12/14
1
1
EA
EA
DOOR SWEEP
THRESHOLD
95WH
896S MS/LA
AL
AL
NGP
NGP
Catalog Number
FURNISHED BY GATE MANUF
LD-99-NL-OP-110MD-WH PBAR
20-079
23-030-ICX
23-030
FURNISHED BY GATE MANUF
DIREKT
Finish
Mfr
B/O
VON
SCH
SCH
SCH
B/O
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 15
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):
GATE
EACH TO HAVE:
Qty
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
Description
HINGE
PANIC HARDWARE
RIM HOUSING
FSIC CONST. CORE
FSIC CORE
DOOR PULL
GATE CLOSER
626
626
626
BLK
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
QTY
1 EA
DESCRIPTION
KEY CABINET
CATALOG NUMBER
1201 (60 CAP)
FINISH
GRY
MFR
LUN
HANDING
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE
BEXLEY SQUARE
087100-27
6/12/14
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Glass for doors, all-glass entrances, storefront framing, and full height glass partitions.
Glazing sealants and accessories.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 084126 "All-Glass Entrances"
DEFINITIONS
A.
Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
ASTM C 1036.
C.
IBC: International Building Code.
D.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Glass Samples: For the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square.
1.
Insulating glass.
C.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings.
GLAZING
088000 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Product Certificates: For glass.
C.
Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who
are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace
insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to
glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior
surfaces of glass.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each
glass type.
1.
2.
GLAZING
Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer.
Obtain reflective-coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.
088000 - 2
Bexley City Hall
B.
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B.
Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and
under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.
1.
Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according
to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
a.
Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s).
b.
Importance Factor: II.
c.
Exposure Category: B.
2.
Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass
deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1
inch (25 mm), whichever is less.
C.
Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with
16 CFR 1201, Category II.
D.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1.
For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
2.
U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
2.3
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
2.
B.
GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety
glazing standard with which glass complies.
GLAZING
088000 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
C.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one
component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
D.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with
performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.
E.
Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heatstrengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is
indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully
tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.
2.4
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B.
Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
2.5
INSULATING GLASS
A.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.
Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
2.7
Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,
including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
GLAZING
088000 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2.
2.8
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for
application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
2.9
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
1.
Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on
glass framing members and glazing components.
a.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
GLAZING
088000 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Presence and functioning of weep systems.
Minimum required face and edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B.
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible
marks in the completed Work.
3.3
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or
impair appearance.
C.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
D.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
G.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
GLAZING
088000 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
I.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
J.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
GLAZING
088000 - 7
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
3.6
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of
dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1.
If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,
remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
C.
Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
D.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in
writing by glass manufacturer.
3.7
MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A.
Glass Type GL-1 : Clear fully tempered float glass.
1.
Location:
a.
Interior doors, and sidelites (except “all-glass” doors and sidelites).
b.
Interior installations of storefront system (vestibule area).
2.
3.
B.
Glass Type GL-2 : Clear fully tempered float glass.
1.
Location:
a.
“All-glass” doors, and sidelites,
b.
“All-glass” full height partitions
2.
3.
3.8
Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.
Safety glazing required.
Minimum Thickness: ½ inch
Safety glazing required.
INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE
A.
Glass Type GL-3: Clear insulating glass.
1.
Location: Exterior store front installations.
2.
Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
3.
Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.
4.
Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
GLAZING
088000 - 8
Bexley City Hall
5.
6.
7.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Interspace Content: Air.
Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
Safety glazing required.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING
088000 - 9
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating: , hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and
runners.
1.
Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
b.
2.
Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
b.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.015 inch (0.38 mm).
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness,
with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
2.
D.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm) [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)].
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-)
thick, galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
E.
1014-0001
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm).
Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm).
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in
diameter.
C.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053
inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
D.
Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1.
2.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel
stud size.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that
hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
B.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
2.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fireresistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect
adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 3
Bexley City Hall
3.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
3.
E.
3.5
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
Direct Furring:
1.
2.
F.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
Screw to wood framing.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) <Insert spacing> o.c.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a.
3.
4.
5.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
E.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3
mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Interior gypsum board.
Tile backing panels.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
2.
Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for
ceramic tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
Bexley City Hall
2.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and
mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Thickness: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
D.
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
Temple-Inland.
USG Corporation.
Core: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm), regular type.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
Shapes:
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 2
Bexley City Hall
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
1014-0001
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.4
2232 E. Main St.
Fry Reglet Corp.
Gordon, Inc.
Pittcon Industries.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
Finish: As selected from manufacturer’s standard finishes
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
C.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a.
3.
4.
2.5
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 3
Bexley City Hall
1.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
D.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
Pecora Corporation;.
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
E.
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
F.
Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in
area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
K.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: In bathrooms.
Single-Layer Application:
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 5
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
3.
3.4
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
b.
At high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
L-Bead: Use where indicated.
U-Bead: Use where indicated.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
3.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 6
Bexley City Hall
3.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 7
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Ceramic mosaic tile.
Glazed wall tile.
Tile backing panels.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B.
ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,
ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,
ANSI A108.10,
ANSI A108.11,
ANSI A108.12,
ANSI A108.13,
ANSI A108.14,
ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications
for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C.
Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
D.
Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished
tile surfaces.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
For mosaic tile, assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for
each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at
least 12 inches (300 mm) square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in
color or colors approved for completed Work.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory.
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2.
Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type,
composition, and color indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
D.
Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each color or finish from single source or producer.
1.
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate
from single source or producer.
1.
C.
Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and
aggregate, from single manufacturer.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section from a single manufacturer:
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 2
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Cementitious backer units.
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced
by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements
specified.
C.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
2.3
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
Porcelain Tile Type FT-1: Porcelain Floor Tile.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.
Substitutions only accepted with Architects prior written approval.
Composition: Porcelain.
Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Ceramic Tile Type WT-1: Glazed wall tile.
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.
Substitutions only accepted with Architects prior written approval.
Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,
selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Base Cove: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch (50.8 by 25.4 mm).
Base Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 1
inch (50.8 by 25.4 mm).
Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by
1 inch (50.8 by 25.4 mm).
External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2
by 1 inch (50.8 by 25.4 mm).
Internal Corners: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch (50.8 by 25.4 mm).
Ceramic Tile Type WT-2: Glazed wall tile.
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 3
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
3.
2.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.
Substitutions only accepted with Architects prior written approval.
Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,
selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a.
Base Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 1
inch (50.8 by 25.4 mm).
b.
External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2
by 1 inch (50.8 by 25.4 mm).
c.
Internal Corners: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch (50.8 by 25.4 mm).
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, Type A, in maximum lengths
available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.5
C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.
Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
FinPan, Inc.; ProTEC Concrete Backer Board.
USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Ardex Americas.
b.
Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company.
c.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
d.
Bostik, Inc.
e.
C-Cure.
f.
Custom Building Products.
g.
Jamo Inc.
h.
Laticrete International, Inc.
i.
MAPEI Corporation.
j.
Merkrete Systems; Parex USA, Inc.
k.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
l.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
m.
TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.7
Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B.
Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick.
C.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic
or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring
applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
Blanke Corporation.
Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.
Schluter Systems L.P.
D.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
E.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change
color or appearance of grout.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
CERAMIC TILING
Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.
Custom Building Products; Grout Sealer.
Jamo Inc.; Grout Sealer.
093013 - 5
Bexley City Hall
d.
e.
f.
2.8
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Grout Sealer.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-99, Summitseal II.
TEC, H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.; Grout Guard Plus Penetrating Grout
Sealer.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1.
2.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances
required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with
surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
a.
b.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
scarified.
Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
grinding.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tilesetting material manufacturer.
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
B.
Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3
CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the
ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA
installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and
grouting materials used.
1.
For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a.
Tile floors in wet areas.
B.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D.
Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same
size, align joints.
Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1.
Glazed Wall Tile: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
2.
Porcelain Floor Tile: 1/8 inch.
G.
Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 7
Bexley City Hall
H.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above
them.
I.
Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other
flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
J.
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written
instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer
from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.4
TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written
instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding
material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new
matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
2.
3.6
Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended
by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by
testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and
plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and
after cleaning.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
B.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
C.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 8
Bexley City Hall
3.7
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1.
Ceramic Tile Installation FT-1: TCNA F113; thinset mortar.
a.
b.
c.
B.
Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:
1.
Ceramic Tile Installation WT-1 and WT-2: TCNA W243; thinset mortar on gypsum
board.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Ceramic Tile Type: FT-1.
Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Standard sanded cement grout.
Ceramic Tile Type: WT-1 and WT-2.
Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Standard sanded cement grout.
Shower Wall Installations (wall above shower enclosure), Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:
1.
Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA B412, WT-1; thinset mortar on cementitious backer
units or fiber-cement backer board.
a.
b.
c.
Ceramic Tile Type: WT-1.
Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Standard sanded cement grout.
END OF SECTION 093013
CERAMIC TILING
093013 - 9
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm)
in size.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
1.4
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern,
and texture.
Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-)
long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.5
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.7
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent
of quantity installed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class B materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Source Limitations:
1.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
2.3
ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-1)
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
United States Gypsum Company.
B.
Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
C.
Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated on drawings.
D.
Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
E.
Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings.
F.
Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels
treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,
mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or
bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to
ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
B.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
C.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 3
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
D.
2.5
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate
seismic forces.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
United States Gypsum Company.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
United States Gypsum Company.
Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's
extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's
designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying
with seismic design requirements and the following:
1.
2.
Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher
for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for
Alloy and Temper 6063-T5.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04
mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions
for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
B.
Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic
design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 5
Bexley City Hall
8.
9.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches
(200 mm) from ends of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system
to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
2.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
1.
3.4
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
Install panels in a basket-weave pattern.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Resilient base.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12
inches (300 mm) long.
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.4
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products
during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35
deg C).
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 1
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VINYL BASE
A.
Provide product indicated on drawings.
B.
Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).
1.
2.
Group: I (solid, homogeneous).
Style and Location:
a.
b.
Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet.
Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with non-carpet flooring.
C.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
D.
Height: As indicated on drawings.
E.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Preformed.
G.
Inside Corners: Preformed.
2.2
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient
products and substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 2
Bexley City Hall
3.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are
to be installed.
1.
D.
3.3
At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1.
C.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
Type of subfloor.
Type of installation.
Pattern of installation.
Pattern type, location, and direction.
Pile direction.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
1.
2.
D.
Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade
resistance.
Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long
Samples.
Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
1.6
Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.7
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 5 tile units.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Comply with CRI 104.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
C.
Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
D.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,
install carpet tiles before installing these items.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 2
Bexley City Hall
1.10
A.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
WARRANTY
Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
3.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs,
dimensional stability, loss of face fiber, and delamination.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE
A.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.
B.
Color: Match Architect's samples.
C.
Pattern: Match Architect's samples.
D.
Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
2.2
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for
installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
C.
Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown,
of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize
running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects.
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 3
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
C.
3.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to
receive carpet tile installation.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8
mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
D.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C.
Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut
edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
H.
Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not
fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 4
Bexley City Hall
3.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor
Installations."
C.
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096813
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
1.
Gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523. “Egshell”
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Paint: 1 Gallon of each material and color applied.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
2.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.7
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams
Company (The); ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Paint, or a comparable product by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Benjamin Moore & Co.
M.A.B. Paints.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Pratt & Lambert.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its
"MPI Approved Products Lists."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
2.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
D.
Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
Wood: 15 percent.
2.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D.
Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E.
Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
F.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
G.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
E.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
F.
Wood Substrates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 3
Bexley City Hall
3.3
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Equipment, including panelboards.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Metal conduit.
Plastic conduit.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Equipment, including panelboards.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Metal conduit.
Plastic conduit.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 4
Bexley City Hall
g.
h.
3.
3.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
Other items as directed by Architect.
Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
2.
3.5
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC.
1)
Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Wall Primer.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
1)
INTERIOR PAINTING
Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Paint.
099123 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
END OF SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 6
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 102113.15 - STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal
screens.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.
Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars and locations of
blocking for surface-mounted toilet accessories.
Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
Show locations of floor drains.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
1.4
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.
Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6inch- (152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
Each type of hardware and accessory.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.15 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners.
Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners.
Door Bumper: One door bumper(s) with associated fasteners.
Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners.
Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and
other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before
fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bradley
Corporation; “Stainless Steel - Series 500” or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Accurate Partitions Corp.; ASI Group.
General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
Metpar Corp.
B.
Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor anchored.
C.
Urinal-Screen Style: Floor anchored.
D.
Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core
material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures;
corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Provide with nosightline system. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.
1.
2.
Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resinimpregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25
mm) for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for pilasters.
Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars
mounted on units of size and material adequate for panel to withstand applied downward
load on grab bar of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446,
without deformation of panel.
STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.15 - 2
Bexley City Hall
3.
E.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at
locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
Urinal-Screen Construction:
1.
Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction.
F.
Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses as follows:
1.
Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than
0.050 inch (1.27 mm).
2.
Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch (0.79 mm).
3.
Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch (0.79 mm).
4.
Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels.
G.
Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-mm)
nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
H.
Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and
construction of pilasters; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.
I.
Brackets (Fittings):
1.
J.
2.3
Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; stainless steel.
Stainless-Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured finish on exposed faces. Protect
exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering
before shipment.
HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.
1.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold
doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door.
2.
Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency
access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that
comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as
accessible.
3.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4.
Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.
5.
Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments designated as accessible.
B.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished
to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for
through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel,
or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel anchors compatible with related materials.
STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.15 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
B.
Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.
C.
Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate
requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories and solid blocking
within panel where required for attachment of toilet accessories.
B.
Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide
shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
C.
Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies
with leveling adjustment nuts at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes at posts to conceal anchorage.
D.
Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide inswinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging
doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments designated as
accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
devices.
1.
Maximum Clearances:
a.
b.
Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).
STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.15 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2.
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets
attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
a.
b.
Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B.
Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (51 mm)
into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level,
plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of
pilasters when doors are in closed position.
C.
Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and
plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's
written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113.15
STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.15 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Public-use washroom accessories.
Public-use shower room accessories.
Childcare accessories.
Custodial accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.4
Construction details and dimensions.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
Material and finish descriptions.
Features that will be included for Project.
Manufacturer's warranty.
Coordination drawing: show size and locations of required blocking and recesses.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products
from single source from single manufacturer.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.7
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bradley
Corporation or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
2.2
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
See drawings for Bradley basis of design products
CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bradley
Corporation: diaper changing station indicated on Drawings, or comparable product by one of
the following:
1.
2.3
Koala.
CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bradley
Corporation: product indicated on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with
corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 102819 - TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes frameless shower doors and enclosures.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for shower doors and enclosures.
B.
Shop Drawings: For tub and shower doors and enclosures. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and attachment details.
C.
Samples for Verification: For tub and shower doors and enclosures.
1.
Glass and glazing; 12 inches (305 mm) square.
2.
Trim; 12-inch (305-mm) lengths.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For tub and shower doors and enclosures to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on Shop Drawings.
TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
102819 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.8
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tub and shower doors
and enclosures that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period without
monetary limitation.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Structural failures including excessive deflection.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FRAMELESS ENCLOSURES
A.
Frameless glass panels with mounting and operating hardware of types and sizes required to
support imposed loads.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
B.
Agalite; Hartung Glass Industries.
Alumax; Sapa Extrusions, Inc.
American Shower Door.
Artistcraft Shower Doors.
Basco, Inc.
Cardinal Shower Enclosures; Hoskin & Muir, Inc.
Century Bathworks.
Fleurco Shower Doors.
Kohler Co.
Southeastern Aluminum Products, Inc.
Hardware and Trim: Manufacturer's standard units as indicated and as required for complete
installation.
1.
Materials:
a.
Aluminum:
1)
b.
Stainless Steel:
1)
C.
Finish: Clear anodic.
Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish.
Swinging Doors: Hinged for 135 degrees swing. Self-centering when doors are within 15
degrees of closed position. Soft bulb seal or wipes; affixed to door to direct water back into
enclosure and provide a tight water seal.
TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
102819 - 2
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
1014-0001
Hinges: Top-and-bottom pivots.
Door Pulls: Back-to-back towel bars.
a.
D.
2232 E. Main St.
Towel Bar Length: 18 inches (457 mm).
Glazing: Safety glazing materials complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II, with permanently
etched identification acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Glass Nominal Thickness: As determined by manufacturer based on panel size.
Clear Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear), Kind FT.
a.
3.
Obscured Panels: Acid etched, or Sandblasted.
Protective, Self-Cleaning, Glass Coating: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface
having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause
water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading.
E.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel or other noncorrosive fasteners.
F.
Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1.
G.
Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 302 or 304.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Prepare and install as recommended in manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent
requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing Manual."
B.
Clean substrates, removing projections, filling voids, and sealing joints.
C.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels, and anchor
securely in place.
D.
Fasten components securely in place, with provisions for thermal movement. Install with
concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
102819 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
E.
Install components to drain and return water to tub or shower.
F.
Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
G.
Repair, refinish, or replace components damaged during installation.
3.2
1014-0001
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust operating parts and hardware for smooth, quiet operation and watertight closure.
Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 102819
TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
102819 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Portable fire extinguishers.
Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel
style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing semirecessed method and
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.
B.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 1
Bexley City Hall
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Potter
Roemer LLC; Alta Model No. 7022-A-RR. Or, with prior approval of Architect, a
comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
American Specialties, Inc.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
GMR International Equipment Corporation.
Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division.
Larsens Manufacturing Company.
Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.
MOON American.
Nystrom, Inc.
Strike First Corporation of America.
B.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C.
Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
1.
Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
D.
Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1.
Rolled-Edge Trim: 2 inch backbend depth.
E.
Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.
F.
Door Material: Steel sheet.
G.
Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.
H.
Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1.
2.
J.
Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch.
Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open
180 degrees.
Accessories:
1.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location.
a.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 2
Bexley City Hall
K.
1014-0001
Materials:
1.
2.
2.3
2232 E. Main St.
Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
a.
Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
b.
Color: Red.
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm
thick, Class 1 (clear).
FABRICATION
A.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.4
Weld joints and grind smooth.
Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch (13 mm) thick.
Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.
Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets will be
installed.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and trim style.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
drawings cover sheet.
B.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E.
Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 104413
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 4
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
COORDINATION
A.
1.6
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
104416 - 1
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Potter
Roemer LLC; Model No. 3005, or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Amerex Corporation.
Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International.
Badger Fire Protection.
Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
Fire End & Croker Corporation.
Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division.
Larsens Manufacturing Company.
MOON American.
Nystrom, Inc.
Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; Pem Systems, Inc.
Pyro-Chem; Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products.
Strike First Corporation of America.
Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)
nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel
container.
1.
Color: Red
2.
Pressure gauge: yes
3.
Hose: yes
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
104416 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
B.
3.2
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
104416 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Motor-operated roller shades with single rollers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband
materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
1.
C.
1.4
Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.
Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal,
and control wiring.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches (250
mm) long.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Qualification Data: For Installer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.7
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and
location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in
spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed
units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MechoShade
Systems, Inc; MechoShade Electro/3 with fascia, or a comparable product by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Draper Inc.
Insolroll Window Shading Systems.
Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
Qmotion Shades.
Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
MOTOR-OPERATED, SINGLE-ROLLER SHADES
A.
Motorized Operating System: Provide factory-assembled, shade-operator system of size and
capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions indicated,
complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch,
enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for reliable
operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate
operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system.
1.
2.
Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in roller.
a.
Electrical Characteristics: Single phase, 110 V, 60 Hz.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413 - 2
Bexley City Hall
3.
4.
5.
1014-0001
Remote Control: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or
flush mounting. Provide the following for remote-control activation of shades:
a.
Group Control Station: Maintained-contact, three-position, rocker-style, wallswitch-operated control station with open, close, and center off functions for
single-switch group control.
b.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to stop
shades automatically at fully raised and fully lowered positions.
Operating Features:
a.
B.
2232 E. Main St.
Group switching with integrated switch control; single faceplate for multiple
switch cutouts.
Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses
required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands
indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and
idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1.
2.
3.
Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade.
Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
C.
Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions
indicated.
D.
Shadebands:
1.
2.
Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.
Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
a.
b.
E.
Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.
Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Installation Accessories:
1.
Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and
operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
a.
b.
2.
2.3
Shape: L-shaped.
Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband
when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm).
Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A.
Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B.
Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413 - 3
Bexley City Hall
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.4
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
Type: PVC-coated polyester.
Weave: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
Thickness: .As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
Weight: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range..
Roll Width: single roll per opening. Size to fit opening.
Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.
Openness Factor: 3 percent.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A.
Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B.
Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74
deg F (23 deg C):
1.
C.
Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening
in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2-inch (13-mm) total, plus
or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening
in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).
Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except
as follows:
1.
Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4,
provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure
shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion
of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of
connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A.
Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Electrical Connections: Connect motor-operated roller shades to building electrical system.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413 - 4
Bexley City Hall
3.3
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C.
Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.
END OF SECTION 122413
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413 - 5
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes plastic-laminate countertops.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product high-pressure decorative laminate.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
C.
Samples for Verification:
1.
1.3
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets soap
dispensers electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in plastic-laminate
countertops.
Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface
finish.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops
have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements
specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123623.13 - 1
Bexley City Hall
1.6
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
C.
Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that countertops comply with
requirements of grades specified.
B.
Grade: Custom.
C.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
D.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
E.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
F.
Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue, medium-density fiberboard
made with exterior glue, or exterior-grade plywood.
G.
Core Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
1.
H.
Build up countertop thickness as indicated on drawings.
Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of
countertop substrate.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123623.13 - 2
Bexley City Hall
2.2
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
WOOD MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
2.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, and Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
3.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: [1-1/4-inch (32-mm)] [2-inch (51-mm)]
<Insert dimension> OD, [brown] [black] <Insert color>, molded-plastic grommets and
matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1.
B.
2.4
<Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
Paper Slots: [12 inches (305 mm)] [17 inches (432 mm)] long by 1-3/4 inches (45 mm) wide
by 1 inch (25 mm) deep; [brown] [black] <Insert color>, molded-plastic, paper-slot liner with
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) lip.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets, or as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
B.
Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work
as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
1.
C.
Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items.
Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels,
splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123623.13 - 3
Bexley City Hall
2232 E. Main St.
1014-0001
shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints
where shown on Shop Drawings.
1.
Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices
located within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding
24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a
constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.
D.
Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
E.
Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
F.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and to walls with adhesive.
Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material
manufacturer.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 123623.13
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123623.13 - 4